JP2015089486A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide technology enabling an adequate setting of variation time of symbols that are the object of a variation display.SOLUTION: In a selection processing of a variation pattern selection table, a "standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table" is set to default (step S2470), but in a "probability variable state" or in a "time shortening state" (step S2472: Yes), if a first special symbol's number of operation memory is zero (0) (step S2476: Yes), when a second special symbol is variably displayed (step S2478: Yes), a "specific condition time variation pattern selection table address selection table" is set (step S2480). Thus, even when the number of operation memory is one (1) or less, a shortening variation time can be set.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs internal lottery corresponding to each of a plurality of symbols and displays a variation display for each symbol.

  Conventionally, with respect to this type of gaming machine, there is known a prior art in which a jackpot lottery is performed corresponding to a plurality of symbols of a first special symbol and a second special symbol (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this prior art, when a winning occurs at the first starting opening, a random value is stored in the first special symbol storage area, and when a winning occurs at the second starting opening, a random number is stored in the second special symbol storing area. In the case where both are stored, the big hit lottery is performed by preferentially using the random number value stored in the second special symbol storage area.

  In particular, in the above-described prior art, when the big hit lottery is performed by referring to the random number value stored in the second special symbol storage area when the storage number of the first special symbol storage area is “0”, the variation time can be shortened. In the case where the variation pattern determination table is determined, and the big hit lottery is performed with reference to the random number value stored in the second special symbol storage area when the number of storage in the first special symbol storage area is “greater than 0” The variation pattern determination table in which the variation time is not shortened is determined.

  According to the above prior art, in the state in which an effect (for example, a pre-read notification effect for the stored random number value) is performed in response to the first special symbol variation display, the next variation has priority. 2 When a special symbol's variation display is performed, the variation time at that time is prevented from being unexpectedly greatly shortened, and sufficient production time is ensured between the productions corresponding to the variation display for each symbol. It is thought that they can be related to each other.

JP 2011-072572 A

  The above-described prior art is considered to be effective to some extent in placing importance on the mutual relationship between the effects by design. However, if the change time of the priority second special symbol cannot be shortened, there is a problem that the time efficiency of the game is lowered, and the game is slow and boring. However, if the variation time of the priority second special symbol can always be shortened, the number of memories stored in the second special symbol memory area is less likely to be accumulated compared to the first special symbol memory area, As a result of the target being biased only to the first special symbol, there arises a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique that can appropriately set the variation time of a symbol to be subjected to variation display.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution is the first lottery required for executing a predetermined internal lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) when a first lottery opportunity (for example, winning at the start winning opening) occurs during the game. First lottery element acquisition means for acquiring elements, first lottery element storage means for storing up to a predetermined maximum number of the first lottery elements acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means, and the first lottery element during the game When a second lottery opportunity separate from the lottery opportunity occurs, the second lottery element acquisition means for acquiring the second lottery element necessary for execution of the internal lottery and the second lottery element acquisition means acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means 2nd lottery element storage means for storing up to a predetermined maximum number of 2 lottery elements and a predetermined start condition, for example, the symbol is not changing, and if the previous change has been made, the symbol stop display is confirmed Condition) is satisfied. When there is a memory of only one of the first lottery element or the second lottery element by either the lottery element storage means or the second lottery element storage means, the existing memory is consumed and the internal While the lottery is executed, when there is storage of both the first lottery element and the second lottery element by both the first lottery element storage means and the second lottery element storage means, the second lottery element A lottery execution unit that preferentially consumes memory and executes the internal lottery, and when the internal lottery is executed by consuming the memory of the first lottery element by the lottery execution unit, a preset variation time A first symbol display means for suspending and displaying the first symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery after the first symbol corresponding to the first lottery element is variably displayed, and the lottery execution means When the internal lottery is executed while consuming the memory of the second lottery element, the result of the internal lottery is displayed after variably displaying the second symbol corresponding to the second lottery element over a preset fluctuation time. 2nd symbol display means for stopping and displaying the 2nd symbol in the manner of representing (each symbol also includes, for example, a symbol visually recognized), and a variation display of the 1st symbol by the 1st symbol display means or The number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage unit or the second lottery element storage unit by the second lottery element storage unit respectively corresponding to the variation display of the second symbol by the second symbol display unit Individual reference defining means for defining individual criteria for setting the variation time according to the number of stored elements, and the number of stored first lottery elements by the first lottery element storing means must not satisfy a specific condition. The individual symbol is applied to each of the first symbol variation display by the first symbol display means or the second symbol variation display by the second symbol display means, and the variation time is set. While determining the variation pattern, when the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage unit satisfies the specific condition, the individual symbol is displayed when the second symbol display unit displays the variation of the second symbol. And a variation pattern determining unit that determines the variation pattern by applying a specific criterion different from the criterion.

According to this solving means, for example, a game is performed in the following manner.
(1) When the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game or the second lottery opportunity occurs, the corresponding first lottery element or second lottery element is acquired.
(2) The acquired first lottery element or second lottery element is individually stored. Note that each lottery element is not stored exceeding the maximum number.

(3) An internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed using the stored lottery elements. At this time, if both the first lottery element and the second lottery element are stored, the internal lottery is performed using the second lottery element preferentially. Such priorities provide superiority between the result of the internal lottery performed using the first lottery element and the result of the internal lottery performed using the second lottery element (for example, the latter is the former Effective).

(4) In any case, when the internal lottery is performed in (3) above, the variable display and stop display of the symbol (first symbol or second symbol) corresponding to the storage of the lottery element consumed at that time are performed. .
(5) Regarding the setting of the variation time, individual standards are defined in advance for each symbol. Individual standards related to the setting of the variation time are defined according to the number of stored lottery elements corresponding to each symbol.

(6) Therefore, when determining the variation pattern related to the setting of the variation time when displaying the variation of each symbol, when individual criteria are applied to each of the first symbol or the second symbol, the variation time of each symbol is Each is expanded or contracted depending on the number of stored corresponding lottery elements. At this time, for the second symbol of priority, for example, if the variable time is set to be relatively long when the number of stored second lottery elements is relatively small, it is long. There is an advantage that the occurrence of the second lottery opportunity is promoted during the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is set, so that the memory number of the second lottery element can be expected to be recovered. However, on the other hand, setting a relatively long variation time decreases the variation efficiency for the second symbol, and thus may slow down the game tempo and slow down the game.

(7) Therefore, in the present solution means, in setting the variation time of the second symbol which gives priority to the variation display, an individual criterion is applied on the condition that the number of the first lottery elements corresponding to the other first symbol is stored. Or apply different specific criteria. The condition that the number of memorized elements of the first lottery is the condition is that the variation of the second symbol, which has priority over the first symbol, should be continued, or even if the superiority of each symbol is not considered. This is for distinguishing from the storage number of the first lottery element whether it is a situation in which it can be predicted that the variation of two symbols (meaning variation display and stop display for each time) is repeated. For example, when the number of memories of the first lottery element tends to be relatively large, the first symbol variation can be displayed by the storage of the second lottery element being interrupted. In this case, since the variation of the second symbol should be repeatedly executed rather than the first symbol, the variation pattern is determined by applying individual criteria. On the other hand, when the number of memories of the first lottery element tends to be extremely small, even if the memory of the second lottery element is interrupted, the variable display of the first symbol is not performed. In this case, even if the priority of the second symbol is not particularly considered, if the second lottery trigger can be generated, it can be predicted that the variation of the second symbol is repeatedly executed. The variation pattern is determined by applying a specific standard without applying.

  As described above, in the present solution, when individual criteria are applied in determining the variation pattern on the basis of the number of memories of the first lottery element (depending on whether or not the number of memories satisfies a specific condition) This makes it easy to continue the variation of the second symbol. On the other hand, when a specific criterion is applied with the number of memories of the first lottery element as a condition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game efficiency without hindering the second symbol variation from continuing naturally. .

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1, wherein the individual reference defining means stores the corresponding second lottery element when the second symbol display is displayed by the second symbol display means. It is defined as the individual criterion that the variation time is set to be longer when the storage of the second lottery element is less than or equal to the predetermined number compared to the variation time set when the predetermined number is exceeded. The variation pattern determining means is configured to display the second symbol variation by the second symbol display means when the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage unit satisfies the specific condition. In determining the variation pattern, the variation time set when the memory of the corresponding second lottery element exceeds a predetermined number and the memory of the second lottery element are equal to or less than the predetermined number The variation time set in the case that is equal is to apply as said specific criteria.

According to this solution, the following features are added.
(8) When “individual standard” is applied in determining the variation pattern, a relatively long variation time is set when the number of stored second lottery elements corresponding to the second symbol is equal to or less than a predetermined number. This promotes the occurrence of the second lottery trigger during the display of the variation of the second symbol by setting the variation time relatively long, and contributes to preventing the number of memories of the second lottery element from being interrupted. . Thereby, even in a situation where the number of memories of the first lottery element is relatively large, it is easy to continue the variation of the second symbol that is given priority, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(9) If the number of stored first lottery elements is extremely small, a “specific criterion” can be applied in determining the variation pattern. According to the “specific criterion”, even when the number of memories of the second lottery element is small, the variation time equivalent to the variation time set when the number of memories is relatively large (for example, the variation shortened by the same amount) Time) is set. This contributes to maintaining a state in which the game efficiency is increased by setting the variation time to be shortened. Thereby, in the situation where the number of memories of the first lottery element is extremely small, it is possible to efficiently change the second symbol and suppress the game from becoming slow.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of this solution means that the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the first symbol display means in the solution means 1 or 2, or by the second symbol display means. Special game execution means for executing a special game when the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode, and after the special game is completed by the special game execution means, the second lottery at least at a normal frequency A time shortening state transition means for shifting from the non-time shortening state in which the opportunity occurs to a time shortening state in which generation of the second lottery trigger is possible at a higher frequency compared to the non-time shortening state; The individual reference defining means is configured to display the first symbol display means by the first symbol display means when the result of the internal lottery is not won for each stored number of corresponding first lottery elements. The second symbol display means when the variation time set in the time reduction state is shortened compared to the variation time set in the non-time reduction state, and the result of the internal lottery is non-winning In the variation display of the second symbol by the above, if the number of the corresponding second lottery elements exceeds the predetermined number, the variation time set in the time reduction state for each number of the second lottery elements stored Corresponding to the variation display of the second symbol by the second symbol display means when the result of the internal lottery is non-winning is shortened compared to the variation time set in the non-time shortening state When the number of the second lottery elements to be stored is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the variation time set in the time reduction state and the fluctuation set in the non-time reduction state for each number of the second lottery elements stored The variation pattern determining means is that the result of the internal lottery is unwinning, and the first lottery element storage means by the first lottery element storage means When determining the variation pattern when displaying the variation of the second symbol by the second symbol display means when the number of memories satisfies the specific condition, the memory of the corresponding second lottery element is less than the predetermined number Even if there is a case, it is applied as the specific criterion that the variation time set in the time reduction state is shortened compared to the variation time set in the non-time reduction state. .

According to this solution, the following features are added.
(10) When the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery, the state shifts to the “time reduction state” after the special game is over. In this “time reduction state”, the occurrence frequency of the second lottery opportunity can be increased compared to the “non-time reduction state”. If the occurrence frequency of the second lottery opportunity increases, the number of memories of the second lottery element is easily accumulated, and even if the consumption efficiency (the fluctuation efficiency of the second symbol) is maintained relatively high, It is possible to make it difficult for the lottery elements to be exhausted (no longer remaining).

Based on the above, “individual standards” are defined as follows.
(11) The variation time of the first symbol set in the “time shortening state” is shortened from the “non-time shortening state” for each stored number of corresponding first lottery elements, but for the second symbol, Only when the memory of the corresponding second lottery element exceeds the predetermined number, the variation time shorter than the “non-time shortened state” is set in the “time shortened state”, and the memory of the second lottery element is less than the predetermined number In this case, a variation time equivalent to the “non-time shortened state” (for example, a variation time extended to the same extent) is set even in the “time shortened state”. This is because a second lottery trigger occurs during the variation display of the second symbol by setting the variation time of the second symbol to be extended and set even in the “time reduction state” by an approach different from the above (8). This contributes to preventing the memory number of the second lottery element from being interrupted.

On the other hand, the following results can be obtained by applying “specific criteria” in determining the variation pattern of the second symbol.
(12) Even if the number of second lottery elements corresponding to the second symbol is less than or equal to a predetermined number, a variation pattern in which a variation time shorter than the “non-time reduction state” is set in the “time reduction state” is determined. Is done. This contributes to maintaining a state in which the gaming efficiency is increased by setting the second symbol to be shortened and set by an approach different from the above (9).

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present solution is a solution launcher in which the ball launching means for driving a game ball toward the game area formed on the surface of the game board, and a first divided and formed in the game area. A first start winning opening that is installed in an area and causes the first lottery opportunity by randomly flowing game balls flowing down in the first area; and the first area in the game area The game ball flowing down by being partitioned is installed in a second area different from the first area, and when the predetermined movable piece is in the closed position, the game ball flowing down the second area A second start winning opening that facilitates the inflow of game balls in the state where the movable piece is operated from the closed position toward the open position while making the inflow difficult, and generating the second lottery opportunity by the inflow The second area is installed in the second area. A starting gate through which game balls flowing down can be randomly passed, and an operation lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable piece of the second start winning opening, triggered by the passing of the gaming ball through the starting gate Operating lottery executing means, movable piece operating means for operating the movable piece of the second start winning prize port toward the open position when winning in the operation lottery, and inflow of game balls to the first starting prize winning port The first privilege is generated in response to the winning generated by the game, while the second privilege having a value different from that of the first privilege is generated for the winning generated by the inflow of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. And a privilege generating means for generating.

According to this solution, the following features are added.
(12) The first lottery opportunity is generated by the inflow of game balls to the first start winning opening in the first area. On the other hand, the second lottery opportunity is generated by the inflow of game balls to the second start winning opening in the second area. At this time, the first area and the second area are separated from each other in the game area, and the flow-down mode of each game ball is different. Therefore, in the mode in which the game ball flows down the first area, the first lottery opportunity is It is easy to occur, and the second lottery opportunity is likely to occur in a mode in which the game ball flows down in the second area.

(13) However, a movable piece is attached to the second starting prize opening, and it is difficult to generate a prize while the movable piece is not operated. In addition, since the trigger for executing the operation lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable piece occurs when the game ball passes through the start gate, if the game ball flows down the second region, While the operation lottery is repeatedly executed by passing the game ball, it is possible to provide many opportunities for facilitating the generation of the second lottery opportunity by the winning.

(14) A privilege (first privilege or second privilege) is generated for each of the winnings at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. At this time, the magnitude of value differs between the first privilege and the second privilege. For example, the second privilege is less valuable (smaller) than the first privilege, or the second privilege is more valuable (larger) than the first privilege.

  The above features specify the configurations related to the occurrence of various events and triggers, and a preferred mode based on these configurations is the following solution.

  Solution 5: In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the solution 4, the winning probability of the operation lottery is changed higher in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state by the time reduction state transition unit. As a result, the frequency of actuation of the movable piece by the movable piece actuating means is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the game ball flows into the second start winning opening is increased to increase the frequency at which the second lottery opportunity can be generated. On the other hand, when the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage unit satisfies the specific condition, the variation pattern determining unit causes the variation pattern determining unit to display the variation of the second symbol by the second symbol display unit. As a result of determining the variation pattern by applying a specific criterion, it is set when the result of the internal lottery is not won regardless of whether the number of stored second lottery elements exceeds the predetermined number or not. The changing time by making shorter than the non-time reduction state, the frequency of the starting condition is met becomes higher as compared to the non-time shortening state that.

Thereby, the following features become remarkable.
(15) When a transition is made to the “time reduction state”, the game is played in such a manner that the game ball flows down in the second area, so that the operation lottery is performed by passing the game ball to the start gate and the winning in the operation lottery , The operation of the movable piece by this winning, the generation of the winning at the second start winning opening by this operation, the acquisition and storage of the second lottery element by the occurrence of this winning, the execution of the internal lottery based on the storage of the second lottery element, A flow such as fluctuation of the second symbol can be generated smoothly. In particular, when the variation pattern is determined by applying “specific criteria” when displaying the variation of the second symbol, the variation time is set to be shortened as a whole regardless of the number of memories of the second lottery element. Can be generated in a short cycle.

(16) At this time, if the value of the second privilege (for example, the number of prize balls) is kept lower than the first privilege, even if the above cycle is shortened to some extent, the value of the second privilege becomes excessive. (For example, only the number of prize balls increases compared to the number of shots) can be suppressed, and a balance between the consumption of game balls and the improvement of game efficiency can be achieved. Or if the value of a 2nd privilege is made higher than a 1st privilege, it can make it easy to receive the value by a 2nd privilege by shortening said cycle, and can aim at the improvement of game property.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately set each variation time for a plurality of symbols.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a front view which shows the periphery of a lamp unit. It is a front view which shows the periphery of a lamp unit. It is a front view which shows the periphery of a lamp unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the reach group selection table at the time of difference | error according to a state and the number of working memory. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern prefetch information command selection table. It is a figure which shows the reach classification corresponding table according to command. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection table selection process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of "the fluctuation pattern selection table address selection table at the time of standard time". It is a figure which shows the structural example of "the fluctuation pattern selection table address selection table at the time of a specific condition". It is a figure which shows the structural example 1 of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example 2 of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example 3 of a fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the variation time based on the variation pattern selected according to the conditions applied as a list. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the number of working memory at the time of a fluctuation | variation corresponding to a 2nd special symbol and a fluctuation time change in the state with the working memory of a 1st special symbol. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the number of working memory at the time of a fluctuation | variation corresponding to a 2nd special symbol and fluctuation time change in the state without the working memory of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) at the time of corresponding to "10 round normal symbol" etc. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (1/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (2/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (3/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (4/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (5/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (6/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (7/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (8/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (9/11). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (10/11). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (11/11). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of a mistake (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of losing (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the fireworks rush or the time off (4/4). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a continuation figure showing game nature using a lamp unit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a lamp drive process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of another process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, 181 to 183 execute effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (first area, left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state This is a second game area (second area, right-handed area) used in a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a low probability time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state, or the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are variable winning devices.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the second variable winning apparatus 31, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the variable start winning apparatus 28 are arranged in the gaming area. They are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of 8a. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. The variable start winning device 28 is decorated with “1st” decoration, the first variable winning device 30 is decorated with “2nd” decoration, and the second variable winning device 31 has The surrounding area is decorated with “3rd”.

  In addition, the variable start winning device 28 includes a first effect lamp 181, the first variable winning device 30 includes a second effect lamp 182, and the second variable winning device 31 includes A third effect lamp 183 is incorporated. Each of these lamps has a built-in light-emitting device (LED) (not shown). By changing the lighting state (lighting color, lighting pattern), each lamp can perform an effect operation by individual light emission. .

  The first effect lamp 181 is a lamp that suggests by light emission that the opening / closing operation by the variable start winning device 28 is executed (variable start winning device light emitting means). The second effect lamp 182 is a lamp that suggests by light emission that the opening / closing operation by the first variable prize winning device 30 is executed (variable pitching device light emitting means). The third effect lamp 183 is a lamp that suggests that the opening / closing operation by the second variable winning device 31 is executed by light emission (variable pitching device light emitting means).

  Furthermore, the variable start winning device 28 is covered with a disk-shaped first cover member 41e disposed on the front surface thereof, and the first variable winning device 30 is formed with a disk-shaped second cover member disposed on the front surface thereof. The second variable winning device 31 is covered with a disc-like third cover member 41a disposed on the front surface thereof.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. The player enters the winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game balls flowing down the left area (first area) of the game area 8a can mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 (first starting winning opening) or enter the normal winning opening 22. There is sex. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area (second area) of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation, or the first at the time of the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the variable winning device 30, entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Of these, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 after passing through the transparent collection passage 30c, and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are Then, after passing through the transparent collection passage 31c, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side of the game area 8a (first area) It is necessary to hit a game ball in a region (left-handed region) (so-called “left-handed” is performed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (second region) in the game region 8a. , It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called “right hit”).

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, a right start winning port ( Enables entry into (without reference sign) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening (game) (There is no gap where the ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right opening winning opening is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where a game ball can be entered, and can enter the right start winning port (movable piece actuating means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port) during the opening operation, but the balls are generated randomly.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning) and a predetermined first condition ( Operates when the first hit to the tenth round of the big hit game are satisfied), and allows the first big winning opening (no reference sign) to enter (special electric accessory, first Special winning event generation means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device disposed above the variable start winning device 28 and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the first big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the first big prize opening. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the first big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the first variable prize-winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  The second variable winning device 31 described above has a predetermined second condition (the 16th round from the 11th round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner). It is activated when the condition (eye condition) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the second big prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, second special prize event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged above the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one open / close member 31a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is operated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the second big prize opening. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the second big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The production unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the rendering unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for rendering (for example, a decorative object having a logo type part reminiscent of a concept unique to the model of the pachinko machine 1). doing. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

[Lamp unit]
A lamp unit 300 is installed at the lower right position of the effect unit 40. The lamp unit 300 is a unit including three lamps such as a front lamp, a middle lamp, and a rear lamp. Each of these lamps has a built-in light-emitting device (LED) (not shown). By changing the lighting state (lighting color, lighting pattern), each lamp can perform an effect operation by individual light emission. . In addition, a lamp motor (not shown) is installed in the lamp unit 300, and these lamp motors can be used as a drive source to move the middle lamp and the rear lamp using a link mechanism, a gear transmission mechanism, or the like. The details of the lamp unit 300 will be described later.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. Also, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (second starting winning port, right starting winning port), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning port), the second variable. All game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the winning device 31 (second grand prize opening), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Of these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off (normal symbol display means). The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of storing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning port 26 every time a game ball flows into the middle start winning port 26. Each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball, the display mode is decreased by one each time. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port. It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one every time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes a plurality of LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

Next, details of the lamp unit 300 will be described.
5 to 7 are front views showing the periphery of the lamp unit 300. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rear lamp 330 of the lamp unit 300 is in the start position, FIG. 6 shows a state in which the rear lamp 330 of the lamp unit 300 is in the intermediate position, and FIG. The state where the rear lamp 330 of the lamp unit 300 is at the end position is shown.

  The lamp unit 300 is a unit including three lamps such as a front lamp 310 (non-movable body), a middle lamp 320 (first movable body), and a rear lamp 330 (second movable body). In these three lamps, the front lamp 310 is disposed on the most front side when viewed from the player side, the middle lamp 320 is disposed behind the front lamp 310, and the rear lamp 330 is disposed behind the middle lamp 320. Is arranged (see FIG. 7). Further, the three lamps have a structure imitating a searchlight. Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the rear lamp 330 and the middle lamp 320 have the same outer shape in a range from the upper part to the lower part via the left part.

Among the three lamps, the front lamp 310 is a structure that is fixedly arranged on the left side of the variable start winning device 28, and the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are structures that move up and down.
The front lamp 310 is a lamp that suggests by light emission that an opening / closing operation by the variable start winning device 28 is executed (non-movable body issuing means). The middle lamp 320 is a lamp that indicates that the opening / closing operation by the first variable winning device 30 is executed by light emission (movable body light emitting means). The rear lamp 330 is a lamp that suggests that the opening / closing operation by the second variable winning device 31 is executed by light emission (movable body light emitting means).

  As shown in FIG. 5, when the lamp unit 300 is not activated, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are hidden behind the front lamp 310, and the player visually recognizes the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330. I can't do it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the lamp unit 300 operates to the first stage, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 rise to the vicinity of the upper left side of the first variable winning device 30. However, the rear lamp 330 is hidden behind the middle lamp 320, and the player cannot visually recognize the rear lamp 330.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, when the lamp unit 300 operates to the second stage, the rear lamp 330 rises to the vicinity of the upper left side of the second variable winning device 31. In this case, the middle lamp 320 does not rise with the rear lamp 330 and stays in the vicinity of the upper left side of the first variable winning device 30.

In the present embodiment, the middle lamp 320 (first movable body) is moved from the start position (retracted position) away from the first variable winning device 30 when the opening / closing operation by the first variable winning device 30 is executed. 1 Moves to an intermediate position (first proximity position) approaching the variable winning device 30.
Further, the rear lamp 330 has an end position (close position) approaching the second variable winning device 31 from a starting end position (retracted position) away from the second variable winning device 31 when an opening / closing operation is performed by the second variable winning device 31. Move to the second proximity position).

  Further, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are arranged at positions that overlap with the front lamp 310 (non-movable body) in the front-rear direction when they are in the start position (retracted position), but at the intermediate position or the end position. In some cases, at least a part or all of the front lamp 310 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap in the front-rear direction in front view. For this reason, when the middle lamp 320 or the rear lamp 330 moves to the intermediate position or the end position, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the hidden middle lamp 320 or the rear lamp 330 suddenly appeared. it can.

  Here, the intermediate position (first proximity position) is a position where the outer edge of the second cover member 41c and the extension line of the outer edge of the middle lamp 320 (see the one-dot chain line A in FIG. 7) overlap in the front-rear direction. Yes. Further, the end position (second proximity position) is a position where the outer edge of the third cover member 41a and the extended line of the outer edge of the rear lamp 330 (see the alternate long and short dash line B in FIG. 7) overlap in the front-rear direction. .

  In this manner, the middle lamp 320 moves to a position where the extension line of the outer edge of the middle lamp 320 and the outer edge of the second cover member 41c overlap in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear lamp 330 moves to a position where the extension line of the outer edge of the rear lamp 330 and the outer edge of the third cover member 41a overlap each other in the front view. For this reason, when the middle lamp 320 is moved, the middle lamp 320 and the first variable prize-winning device 30 are in close proximity, and when the rear lamp 330 is movable, the rear lamp 330 and the second variable prize-winning device 31 are also in close proximity. Thereby, the suggestion effect of the firing position by the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 can be further improved.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 detects the entry of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 (first start winning port) and the variable start winning device 28 (second start winning port, right start winning port). Is for. The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 (second big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are passed through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, and the second large corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A prize opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations (activate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 on the basis of a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes a payout operation of the requested number of game balls (privilege generating means). ). The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, launch solenoid 110, and ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 to provide various lamps 46 to 52, 181 to 183 and the board surface. The lamp 53, the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 are caused to emit light, and the sound effects and sounds are actually output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the saucer lamp 52, the various lamps include a board lamp 53 for decoration and performance installed in the game board unit 8, and a first effect. A lamp 181, a second effect lamp 182 and a third effect lamp 183 are included. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52, 181-183 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  A lamp unit connection board 58 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a front lamp 310, a middle lamp 320 and a rear lamp 330 are connected to the lamp unit connection board 58 in addition to the lamp motor 512. The lamp motor 512 drives the lamp unit 300 (rear lamp 330) via the drive mechanism described above. The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the lamp motor 512, the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 via the lamp unit connection board 58, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes the production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, 181 to 183 and the speakers 54, 55 and 56 as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Control is included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  9 and 10 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets a vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 executes a RAM clear process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 clears the contents stored in the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 10 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, etc., and then backs up the work area of the RAM 76. The entire contents except the validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 12). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 12). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 12). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 uses the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97 as described above. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 9).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, a winning detection signal from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning port switch 86. Read the input state (ON / OFF).

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls. Output the command. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls (first privilege) for the occurrence of a prize at the middle start prize opening 26 is, for example, three, whereas the number of prize balls for the right start prize opening (variable start prize device 28) is given. The number of winning balls (second privilege) is, for example, one, and the number of winning balls at the right starting winning port (variable starting winning device 28) is compared with the number of winning balls given to the occurrence of winning at the middle starting winning port 26. The value of the number of prize balls given for the occurrence of winning is small.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big prize winning solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer. Output.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated in the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 12). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning port switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (whether or not a first lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol (whether or not a second lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 12).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the upper limit (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 12).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. To memorize as a set. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 13).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 14), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 12) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 14) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 14) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 14) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area To memorize as a set. The storing method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 14) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 13).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 14 and step S46 in FIG. 15) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is performed for each of the first special symbol (when a winning occurs at the middle start winning port 26) and the second special symbol (when a winning occurs at the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port)). Executed. Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: First, the main control CPU 72 loads a jackpot determination random number as a random number value for the previous determination. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 15). .

  Step S52: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit confirmation process using the loaded random number. Here, a range of hit values is set for each probability state (low probability state or high probability state), and it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot determination random number is within the range of hit values. When the winning is confirmed here, the main control CPU 72 sets the winning offset (for example, “1”) as a return value. On the other hand, if the winning is not confirmed, the main control CPU 72 sets a non-winning offset (for example, “0”) as a return value. The “offset for winning” and “offset for non-winning” are values indicating whether the determination result of the winning confirmation process (step S52) is “winning” or “non-winning”.

  Step S54: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is the big hit symbol for each symbol stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 15). It is a random number.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol confirmation processing. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) for each of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determined random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 15). Then, a comparison is made with the comparison value stored in the symbol type determination table (not shown in particular), and from the result, whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol” or “probable symbol” Further, it is determined whether the symbol corresponds to “10-round symbol” or “16-round symbol”. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the symbol confirmation offset to a return value based on the determination result. The above processing is performed when the winning offset is set as a return value in the hit confirmation processing in step S52. When the main control CPU 72 sets the non-winning offset in step S52 as a return value, in the current symbol confirmation process, for example, a non-winning symbol confirmation offset can be set as a return value. The “symbol confirmation offset” used here is a value representing “what the winning symbol corresponds to” or “not applicable to the winning symbol (non-winning)” as the determination result performed in the symbol confirmation process (step S56). is there.

  Step S57: The main control CPU 72 generates a special symbol-specific symbol prefetch information command based on the symbol confirmation offset which is a return value. This command represents the result of pre-reading “out of symbol” or “hit symbol type” for each of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol-specific symbol prefetch information command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12).

  Step S58: After executing the procedure so far, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the previous determination result in the hit confirmation process (step S52) is true. This confirmation can be performed using the symbol confirmation offset of the return value set immediately before. In other words, if the symbol confirmation offset is a value representing “out-of-order symbol” (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S60, and conversely if the symbol confirmation offset is a value representing any “big hit symbol type” ( Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S68. In either case, the main control CPU 72 generates a prefetch information command related to the variation pattern in the subsequent procedure. First, the procedure at the time of disconnection will be described.

[Procedure for generating a change pattern prefetch information command at the time of loss]
Step S60: The main control CPU 72 sets a reach group selection table for each state and each number of working memories. The reach group selection table is a table for performing random drawing of the variation pattern using the reach group determination random number among the three random numbers (reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number) related to the determination of the variation pattern. is there. A configuration example of the reach group selection table will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S62: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the stored reach group determination random number from the RAM 76.
Step S64: The main control CPU 72 executes the first variation pattern determination process. In this process, as described above, the variation pattern category lottery (reach type lottery) is performed using the reach group determination random number, and the selected offset is set as a return value. The details of the specific process will be described later together with a configuration example of the reach group selection table.

  Step S66: The main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern prefetch information command using the selected offset value. The command generated here is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12).

[Procedure for generating variation pattern look-ahead information command for hits]
The above procedure is a procedure when the result of the pre-reading hit confirmation is out of place, but when the hit is confirmed by pre-reading (step S58: Yes), a variation pattern pre-reading information command is generated by the following procedure.

  Step S68: In this case, the main control CPU 72 selects an offset that has been fixed in advance for hitting, and sets this as a return value. Therefore, it is not particularly necessary to perform category lottery here.

  Step S66: The main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern prefetch information command fixed in advance using the selected fixed offset value for hitting time. In this way, since the offset is always fixed at the time of hitting, the variation pattern prefetch information command can be of one type. The command generated here is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12). The “fixed offset for hitting time” is a value indicating that the determination result of the previous hit checking process (step S52) was “winning”.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15).

[Reach group selection table by state and working memory count]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the reach group selection table for each state and the number of working memories. In the ROM 76 of the main control CPU 72, for example, a plurality of selection tables are stored in advance for each internal state and each operation memory number. In step S60 of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 stores the current internal state and operation memory. Set the reach group selection table that suits the number of conditions. The internal state condition includes, for example, a low probability non-short state, a low probability short state, a high probability non-short state, or a high probability short state, and the working memory number condition includes, for example, the first special symbol. Or there is a distinction of 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. for each second special symbol. Alternatively, there may be a distinction of 0 to 4, 5, 6, 7, etc. as the total number of working memories. Note that the table shown in FIG. 17 assumes a normal state (low probability non-short state) and 0 or 1 working memory.

  17 is a structure that stores a “comparison value” and an “offset value” in a set of one byte at a time, for example, in order from the head address. Here, the “comparison value” includes eight different values “124”, “174”, “374”, “546”, “616”, “761”, “961”, “999 (0FFFH), for example. ”And reach mode selection offsets“ 06 ”,“ 10 ”,“ 02 ”,“ 06 ”,“ 10 ”,“ 02 ”,“ offset values ”for each“ comparison value ”, “11” and “12” are assigned.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the loaded reach group determined random numbers with the above “comparison value” in order, and if the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, selects the offset value corresponding to the comparison value. For example, if the reach group determination random number at that time is “190”, the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value compared to the first comparison value “124”, so the main control CPU 72 determines the next comparison value “ 174 "and the value of the random number are compared. Again, since the value of the random number exceeds the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 further compares the value of the random number with the next comparison value “374”. In this case, since the value of the random number is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects the corresponding reach mode selection offset “02”. Alternatively, if the reach group determination random number is “979”, the main control CPU 72 has compared to the third comparison value “961” from the bottom, and then exceeded the next comparison value “961”. The reach mode selection offset “12” corresponding to the comparison value “999 (0FFFH)” is selected.

  The offset value selected here is used when specifying the conditions for selection of lottery mode variation pattern table using the reach mode determination random number in the next stage in the actual variation start processing (displacement variation pattern determination processing), etc. Can be used for In the actual processing, the variation pattern determination lottery using the variation pattern determination random number at the final stage is specified through the reach mode variation pattern table selection lottery. In the actual processing, the variation pattern number is selected at the actual variation start (at the variation) from the result of the variation pattern determination lottery at the final stage.

  In addition, in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 16) of this embodiment, the lower byte (EVENT value) of the variation pattern prefetch information command is set only with the reach mode selection offset obtained in the initial selection lottery. Yes. In other words, at the start of actual variation, the final variation pattern number is uniquely determined using all of the reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number and variation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of winning a prize. In the form of “look-ahead”, there is a unique advantage in that the variation pattern look-ahead information command is determined using only the reach group determination random number. More specific description will be given below.

[Change pattern look-ahead information command selection table]
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation pattern prefetch information command selection table. (A) in FIG. 18 shows a table that is applied when the result of prefetching is out of sync, and (B) in FIG. 18 shows a table that is applied when the result of prefetching is hit.

[Change pattern look-ahead information command at the time of loss]
(A) in FIG. 18: The left column in the table indicates reach mode selection offsets “00” to “12” selected using the reach group determined random numbers. The two columns on the right side of the table indicate the values of the variation pattern prefetch information command corresponding to each offset value. Among these, the central column indicates the common “BEH” that is the upper byte (MODE value) of the command, and the rightmost column indicates the lower byte (EVENT value) of the command. That is, the change pattern prefetch information command is described in a word format in which the upper byte is the MODE value (common “BEH”) and the EVENT value (undefined value) of the lower byte is combined therewith.

  If the value of the reach mode selection offset is either “00” or “01” as shown in the upper two rows excluding the heading row in the table (the same applies thereafter), the corresponding variation pattern prefetching is performed. The lower byte of the information command is “00H”. If the value of the reach mode selection offset is any one of “02” to “04”, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command is “02H”. Similarly, for each of the reach mode selection offset values “05” to “12”, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command is “00H”, “01H”, “03H”, “04H”. Either one is selected.

[Hit fluctuation pattern look-ahead information command]
(B) in FIG. 18: The variation pattern prefetch information command at the time of hit is fixed as described above. In other words, when winning is confirmed in the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 16), the main control CPU 72 selects “99” as the fixed reach mode selection offset for winning (step S68 in FIG. 16). In this case, the lower byte of the corresponding variation pattern prefetch information command in the table is always fixed and is “7EH”. The upper byte is common to “BEH”.

[Reach type correspondence table by command]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a reach type correspondence table for each command. This correspondence table shows the reach type (variation pattern information) corresponding to the variation pattern prefetch information command generated in the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 16).

  The left two columns in the table indicate “BEH00H” to “BEH04H” and “BEH7EH (fixed value)” of the variation pattern prefetch information commands. The right column in the table indicates the reach type corresponding to each command.

[Reach type]
Here, “non-reach”, “normal reach”, “weak super reach”, “strong super reach”, and “story reach” of the reach types shown in the table of FIG. 19 collectively refer to the following categories, respectively. It shall be.

(1) “Non-reach”
“Non-reach” as the reach type means that a variation pattern (usually a shift variation pattern) that does not perform reach variation with the variation is selected. In this case, the fluctuation pattern selected in the actual process (fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “non-reach”, and a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, about 1.5 seconds to 12.0 seconds) is selected. Will be.

(2) “Normal reach system”
“Normal reach system” as the reach type means that a reach variation is performed in the variation, but a variation pattern designating a variation effect pattern belonging to “normal reach” is selected in the effect control. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “reach variation”, but a relatively short variation time (for example, about 20 to 30 seconds) is selected. It will be.

(3) "Weak super reach system"
“Weak super reach system” as the reach type means that a change pattern is selected that performs a reach change by the change and specifies a change production pattern belonging to “weak super reach” in the production control. Yes. In this case as well, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always the “reach variation”, and a relatively medium variation time (for example, about 50 to 60 seconds). ) Will be selected.

(4) “Strong super reach system”
“Strong super reach system” as the reach type means that a variation pattern that specifies a variation effect pattern belonging to “strong super reach” on the effect control is selected while performing the reach variation with the variation. Yes. In this case as well, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of loss) is always “reach variation”, and a relatively long variation time (for example, about 100 seconds to 120 seconds) is selected. Will be.

(5) "Story reach system"
“Story reach type” as the reach type means that a change in reach is performed based on the change, and a change pattern that specifies a change effect pattern belonging to “story reach” is selected in the effect control. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual process (the variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection) is always “reach variation”, and among these, the variation time (for example, 150 seconds to About 200 seconds) is selected.

(6) “Fluctuation per hit”
Note that “win fluctuation” as the reach type means that win fluctuation is performed by the fluctuation. In this case, the variation pattern selected in the actual processing (big hit hour variation pattern determination processing) is “big hit hour reach variation”. In addition, since the result of “winning” is more important than what kind of production is designated at the time of winning, only a simple result of “winning fluctuation” is transmitted to the production control device 124. Yes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading information command is generated using only the reach group determination random number among the various random numbers for variation in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 16), and this is sent to the effect control device 124. Sending. In this case, the transmitted variation pattern prefetch information command does not completely specify the unique variation pattern number (specific total variation time) selected by the variation, but the variation is “non-reach” or It can be seen that basic information indicating which one is “reach”, and in the case of “reach”, type information indicating which reach type is clearly indicated. In addition, when the previous determination result is a win, it clearly indicates “win fluctuation”. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently execute the pre-determination effect using the above-described variation pattern prefetch information command in the effect control process by the effect control device 124 while reducing the processing load of the main control CPU 72.

  Further, if the previous determination result is a win, it is a fixed command and the subsequent processing is omitted. Thereby, the processing load by the main control CPU 72 can be further reduced. In addition, since a fixed command representing “hit fluctuation” is transmitted at the time of hitting, it is possible to execute a predetermination effect corresponding to the hitting time correctly in effect control. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 14) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects from the “jump table” the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S6000). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a jackpot gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine game balls are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, when 16 rounds are won, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is set for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 9 game balls are received). Until the ball is counted), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 6 times), whereby the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the 10th round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed from the 11th round to the 16th round. In addition, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 10 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. For 16 round big hits and 10 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( Time shortening state transition means, high probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but most of the balls enter the first big prize opening. Does not occur.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “10 round big hit”, for example, (1) “10 round normal (non-probable change) big win” and (2) “10 round positive change big win” are provided as a plurality of winning types. . In addition to “10 rounds big hit”, “16 rounds big hit” is provided. For example, (3) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”, (4) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”, (5 ) “16 rounds probable big hit 3” is provided. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 10 rounds and 16 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “10 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round normal symbol”, and “10 round probability variable jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round probability jackpot”. Further, “16 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “16 round probability variation big hit 3” corresponds to big hit of “16 round probability variation big hit 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[10 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round normal symbols”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. For this reason, in the “10 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 10 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. The first grand prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) have occurred in one round. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” can be obtained by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends. Granted to a person.

[10-round probable design]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round probability variation symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The big hit game of “10 rounds probable change symbol” also gives the player 10 balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The remaining 11th to 16th rounds of the second variable prize winning device 31 of the second variable prize winning device 31 are shorter in time (0.1 second opening time) than the 1st to 10th rounds. Mouth open once. Therefore, the 10th to 16th rounds of the jackpot game of “16 round probability variation pattern 1” are terminated without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 1” gives the player about 10 rounds (prize balls). Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. In addition, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has been won within one round, the second big prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16-round probability variation 3]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16-round probability variation 3” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

  Here, “16-round probability variation 2” and “16-round probability variation symbol 3” are both common in that 16 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player. In the case of “symbol 2”, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds), whereas it corresponds to “16th round probability variation 3” In this case, the difference is that the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively short (for example, about 2 to 2.5 seconds, which is the same as other interval times). The reason for securing a longer interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16 round probability variation 2” is to secure the stage of the round continuation judge production (treasure challenge production). Because.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “10-round probability variation symbol”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” later. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbol at that time is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. If any of the above is true, the “high probability state” continues (restarts) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “10 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it falls under “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly enters the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 12). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (variation pattern determination means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of loss is whether the current symbol to be changed is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of working memories of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol. In this process, the main control CPU 72 loads each necessary value (offset value, flag, etc.). In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), except when the reach fluctuation is performed. In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → The number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 3 seconds to about 2.5 seconds, but it may be other than these.) Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Change pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described variation pattern determination process at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S2450: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a reach group selection table for each state and each number of working memories. This content is the same as the above-described effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S60 in FIG. 16). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 sets the reach group selection table corresponding to the current conditions according to the internal state and the number of operating memories. Here, in addition to the state and the number of working memories, a reach group selection table may be set for each symbol to be changed (first special symbol or second special symbol) (the same applies to the effect determination process at the time of acquisition). .

  Step S2452: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the reach group determination random number among the various random numbers for variation shifted in the previous special symbol storage area shift process (step S2200 in FIG. 17). The object to be loaded here has the same value as the acquisition effect determination process (step S62 in FIG. 16).

  Step S2454: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the first fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, a variation pattern category lottery (reach type lottery) is performed using the loaded reach group determination random number, and the selected offset is set as a return value. The content of the process here is the same as the above-described acquisition effect determination process (step S64 in FIG. 16), and the detachment reach group selection table (FIG. 17) similar to the above is used for the category lottery. Accordingly, the reach mode selection offset is set to the return value here.

  Step S2456: The main control CPU 72 sets a reach mode selection table using the reach mode selection offset which is the previous return value. The procedure from here is different from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 16). The reach mode selection table set here is used for selection lottery using the reach mode determination random number as an argument in the next stage.

Step S2458: In order to perform the selection lottery, the main control CPU 72 loads a reach mode determination random number.
Step S2460: The main control CPU 72 executes the second variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding variable mode offset from the reach mode selection table based on the reach mode determination random number, and sets the result as a return value. The variation mode offset selected here designates the address of the variation pattern selection table used in the final variation pattern determination lottery.

  Step S2462: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern selection table selection process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation pattern selection table for each state, each variation target symbol, and each number of working memories, in addition to the variation mode offset which is the previous return value. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” for each state, further selects a variation pattern selection table for each variation target symbol and each number of working memories, and then returns the previous return value. The table address indicated by the value of the variable mode offset is finally specified on the ROM 74. The details of the specific process will be further described later using another flowchart.

Step S2464: When the table address is designated, the main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern determination random number which is the last random number.
Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 executes the third variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding variation pattern number from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern determination random number. The main control CPU 72 sets the selected variation pattern number as a return value. The variation pattern number selected here is the unique variation pattern that is finally performed in the variation (variation mode from the start of the change to the occurrence of the notice, the time from the start of the tempe, the reach mode, the reach variation time, and the final stop display. ), And the total fluctuation time (fluctuation seconds) in the fluctuation is uniquely determined from the fluctuation pattern number.

  Step S2468: Finally, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern command from the variation pattern number selected as the return value. The generated variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 12). Then, the effect control device 124 can grasp the change pattern information of the change from the received change pattern command or select the change effect pattern.

[Variation pattern selection table selection processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described variation pattern selection table selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

Step S2470: First, the main control CPU 72 sets “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” as default for each state. That is, the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is set for each state depending on whether the internal state is the “non-time reduction state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “high probability time reduction state”. Here, the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is set by default, but the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is referred to when, for example, the following conditions are satisfied. Will be.
(1) The variation target symbol is the first special symbol in the “non-time shortened state”.
(2) In the “non-time shortened state”, the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol.
(3) The symbol to be changed is the first special symbol in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”.
(4) The symbol to be changed is the second special symbol in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”, and there is an operation memory corresponding to the first special symbol (the number of memories is one or more).

  Accordingly, when either of the above conditions (1) and (2) is met in the subsequent procedures, the main control CPU 72 changes from the “standard time change pattern selection table address selection table” used in the “non-time reduction state”. A variation pattern selection table number is set for each target symbol and the number of working memories, and a final variation pattern table is determined using a variation mode offset that is a return value from that number (variation pattern determination means). When either of the above conditions (3) and (4) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines the change target symbol and operation memory from the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” used in the “time reduction state”. A variation pattern selection table number is set for each number, and a final variation pattern table is determined using a variation mode offset that is a return value from that number (variation pattern determination means). A configuration example of the “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” will be described later.

  Step S2472: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether the current internal state is the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”. In this embodiment, since it is determined that the internal state of the “high probability non-time shortening state (so-called latent probability change)” is not shifted, the “high probability state” also serves as the “time shortening state”. Therefore, if the current internal state is either the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S2474. If the current internal state is neither the “high probability state” nor the “time reduction state” (No), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S2474 to S2480 and proceeds to step S2481.

[In case of "High probability state" or "Time reduction state"]
Step S2474: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter.
Step S2476: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the loaded value is less than a comparison value (for example, 1). Specifically, the presence / absence of the first special symbol working memory is determined at the start of the variation. That is, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than “1” of the comparison value, it means “there is a first special symbol operation memory”, and if the loaded value is less than “1” of the comparison value, “first” It means "no special symbol working memory". When the loaded value is less than the comparison value “1” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2478. If the loaded value is not less than the comparison value “1” (No) and corresponds to “there is a first special symbol operation memory”, the main control CPU 72 skips steps S2478 and S2480 and proceeds to step S2481.

[When there is no first special symbol working memory]
Step S2478: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current variation target symbol is the second special symbol. As a result, if the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 further executes step S2480. When the variation target symbol is the first special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S2480.

[When there is no first special symbol working memory and the second special symbol changes]
Step S2480: Here, the main control CPU 72 sets “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions”. As a result, the default “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is reset (discarded).

  In any case, when the main control CPU 72 sets the “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the standard time” or the “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the specific condition” by the procedure so far, Step S2481 is executed.

  Step S2481: The main control CPU 72 sets a table number for each variation target symbol and each operation memory number from the set “variation pattern selection table address selection table”. The set of table numbers will be further described later using another drawing.

Step S2482: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the final table address from the value of the variable mode offset which is the previous return value. The table address set will be further described later with reference to another drawing.
When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller deviation pattern determination process.

[Standard variation pattern selection table address selection table configuration example]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table”. The “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” shown here is used in the “time reduction state” as an example.

  The “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” used in the “time reduction state” is a configuration in which the address of the “variation pattern selection table number” to be selected for each variation symbol and number of working memories is specified (individual standard) Definition means). Specifically, a “variation pattern selection table number” is designated according to the following conditions.

(1) When the symbol to be changed is the first special symbol and the number of working memories is 0, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 10” is designated.
(2) When the symbol to be changed is the first special symbol and the number of working memories is 1, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 11” is designated.
(3) When the symbol to be changed is the first special symbol and the number of working memories is 2, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 12” is designated.
(4) When the symbol to be changed is the first special symbol and the number of working memories is 3, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 13” is designated.
(5) If the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol and the working memory number is 0, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 20” is designated.
(6) When the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol and the number of working memories is 1, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 21” is designated.
(7) When the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol and the number of working memories is 2, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 22” is designated.
(8) When the symbol to be changed is the second special symbol and the number of working memories is 3, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 23” is designated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the addresses of “variation pattern selection table 20” and “variation pattern selection table 21” shaded in the table of FIG. 24 are designated, even in the “time reduction state”, Finally, a variation pattern for setting a relatively long variation time is selected (determined). A specific example of setting the variation time will be described later.

[Variation pattern selection table address selection table configuration example under specific conditions]
Next, FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a “variation pattern selection table address selection table at a specific condition”. The “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the time of a specific condition” is the number of operation memories only for the second special symbol when there is no first special symbol operation memory in the “time reduction state” or “high probability time reduction state”. This is different from the above in that the address of the “variation pattern selection table number” to be separately selected is designated. Specifically, a “variation pattern selection table number” is designated according to the following conditions.

(1) When the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 90” is designated.
(2) When the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 1, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 91” is designated.
(3) When the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 2, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 92” is designated.
(4) When the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 3, the address of the “variation pattern selection table 93” is designated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the target of the “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the time of the specific condition” is configured only for the second special symbol, the “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the standard time” in FIG. There is no need to configure each symbol as shown in FIG. Therefore, the data capacity of the ROM 74 can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the addresses of “variation pattern selection table 90” and “variation pattern selection table 91” indicated by shading in the table of FIG. 25 are designated, the number of working memories of the second special symbol is one or less. Even in this case, a variation pattern that sets a shortened variation time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) suitable for the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state” is selected (determined). It has become. A specific example of setting the variation time will be described later.

[Configuration example 1 of variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example 1 of the variation pattern selection table. Here, a configuration example of the “variation pattern selection table 10” is given. The “variation pattern selection table 10” is used when the “variation target symbol is the first special symbol and the number of working memories is zero” in the condition (1) when referring to the “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” for each state. An address is selected (designated) from the table of FIG. 24 (application of individual criteria by the variation pattern determining means). Here, for convenience of comparison, it is assumed that “variation pattern selection table 10” is designated from “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” used in “non-time reduction state”.

  In FIG. 26, (A) to (K) show the tables specified by the variable mode offset values “00” to “10” separately for each address. In each table, the range of the variation pattern determination random number is shown in the left column, and the variation pattern number corresponding to the right column is shown.

  For example, when the main control CPU 72 has set the fluctuation mode offset “00” as the return value, the main control CPU 72 is shown in FIG. 26A in step S2481 of the fluctuation pattern selection table selection process (FIG. 23). Specify the table address. In this case, in the variation pattern determination third process (step S2466) of the deviation variation pattern determination process (FIG. 22), the main control CPU 72 determines whether the variation pattern determination random number is any value between 0 and 250. "Special 0" is selected.

  If the main control CPU 72 has set the fluctuation mode offset “01” as a return value, the main control CPU 72 is shown in FIG. 26B in step S2481 of the fluctuation pattern selection table selection process (FIG. 23). Specify the table address. In this case, in the variation pattern determination third process (step S2466) of the deviation variation pattern determination process (FIG. 22), the main control CPU 72 determines whether the variation pattern determination random number is any value between 0 and 250. "Special 1" is selected.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 has set the fluctuation mode offset “02” as a return value, in step S2481 of the fluctuation pattern selection table selection process (FIG. 23), the main control CPU 72 shows the process shown in FIG. Specify the table address. At this time, in the third variation pattern determination process (step S2466) of the variation pattern determination process at the time of deviation (step S2466), if the variation pattern determination random number is within the range of 0 to 200, the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern number as “ Special 2 ”is selected, but if the variation pattern determination random number is 201 or more (within 250), the main control CPU 72 selects“ Special 4 ”as the variation pattern number.

  In the same manner, the variation pattern selection table selection is performed for the variation mode offsets “03”, “04”, “05”, “06”, “07”, “08”, “09”, “10” as return values. In step S2481 of the process (FIG. 23), the main control CPU 72 sequentially shifts to (D), (E), (F), (G), (H), (I), (J), and (K) in FIG. Specifies the table address to be displayed. Then, the main control CPU 72 can select a variation pattern number corresponding to the value of the variation pattern determination random number in each table in the variation pattern determination third processing (step S2466) of the variation pattern determination processing at the time of loss (FIG. 22). .

[Configuration example 2 of variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example 2 of the variation pattern selection table. Here, a configuration example of the “variation pattern selection table 20” and the “variation pattern selection table 21” is given. As described above, the “variation pattern selection table 20” satisfies the condition (5) “the variation target symbol is the second special symbol and the number of working memories is zero” in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”. In this case, an address is selected (designated) from the table of FIG. 24 (application of individual criteria by the variation pattern determining means). In addition, the “variation pattern selection table 21” is used when the “variation target symbol is the second special symbol and the number of working memories is 1” in the condition (6) in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”. An address is selected (designated) on the table of FIG. 24 (application of individual criteria by the variation pattern determining means).

  In this case, for all return values of the variation mode offset set by the main control CPU 72, the main control CPU 72 designates a common (single) table address in step S2481 of the variation pattern selection table selection process (FIG. 23). At this time, in the third variation pattern determination process (step S2466) of the variation pattern determination process at the time of deviation (step S2466), if the variation pattern determination random number is within the range of 0 to 90, the main control CPU 72 sets “ Special 80 ”is selected. The variation time in this case is set to a relatively long time (for example, about 12.0 seconds) even in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”. Alternatively, if the variation pattern determination random number is within the range of 91 to 175, the main control CPU 72 selects “Special 81” as the variation pattern number. The variation time in this case is also set to a relatively long time (for example, about 14.0 seconds). If the variation pattern determining random number is 176 or more (within a range of up to 250), the main control CPU 72 selects “special 82” as the variation pattern number, and the variation time in this case is also a relatively long time. (For example, about 16.0 seconds) is set. In this example, a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) are set, but a table configuration in which a single variation pattern (variation time) is set may be used.

[Configuration example 3 of variation pattern selection table]
Next, FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example 3 of the variation pattern selection table. Here, a configuration example of the “variation pattern selection table 90” and the “variation pattern selection table 91” is given. As described above, the “variation pattern selection table 90” has no first special symbol operation memory in the “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state” (when a specific condition is satisfied), In the case of “the number of working memories is 0”, an address is selected (designated) from the table of FIG. Further, the “variation pattern selection table 91” has no first special symbol operation memory (when a specific condition is satisfied) in the “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state”, and “the second special symbol operation memory”. In the case of “Equation 1”, an address is selected (designated) from the table of FIG. 25 (application of a specific reference by the variation pattern determining means).

  Also in this case, the main control CPU 72 designates a common (single) table address in step S2481 of the variation pattern selection table selection processing (FIG. 23) for all return values of the variation mode offset set by the main control CPU 72. To do. Further, in the variation pattern determination third process (step S2466) of the variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (step S2466), the main control CPU 72 sets the variation pattern number as a variation pattern number regardless of the variation pattern determination random number between 0 and 250. Select “Special 99”. In this case, the variation time is set to a shortening time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) suitable for the “time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”. Here, an example is given in which a single variation pattern (shortened variation time) is set, but a table configuration in which a plurality of variation patterns (all shortened variation times) are set may be used. .

[Variation time setting example based on variation patterns according to application conditions]
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a list of setting examples of the variation time based on the variation pattern selected for each condition to be applied. Among these, (A) in FIG. 29 shows a setting example of the variation time when the variation pattern is selected using the “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table”. FIG. 29B shows an example of setting the variation time when a variation pattern is selected using the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions”.

[When individual standards are applied]
In FIG. 29, (A): When the “standard variation pattern selection table address selection table” is used, the following features become apparent in this embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, compared with the case where winning is obtained by the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, the value when the winning is obtained by the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is high (for example, It is assumed that the selection ratio per 16 rounds big hit is high.

[High probability / short time]
(1) When the deviation variation is performed, different variation times are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol depending on the value of the corresponding “number of operating memories at the start of variation”.

(2) For the first special symbol, if the number of working memories at the start of variation is 1 or more, a variation pattern for setting a shortened variation time (here, 1.5 seconds as an example) is selected. For the second special symbol, if the number of operating memories at the start of variation is 2 or more, a variation pattern for setting a shortened variation time (here, 1.5 seconds as an example) is selected. For this reason, when the result of the internal lottery is out of order, the display of change and the stop display are repeated in a relatively short cycle (about 1.5 seconds + stop display time), so that the game tempo is accelerated and the change efficiency ( The time efficiency of games) can be improved.

[See two shaded cells]
(3) However, for the second special symbol, if the value of “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” is 1 or less (0 to 1 memory number), it is relatively long even at high probability / short time. A variation pattern for setting the variation time is selected (for example, about 12.0 seconds). Thereby, the possibility that the game ball wins the variable start winning device 28 within the variation time can be increased, and the second special symbol can be prioritized for the next variation display. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to interruption of the number of working memories in the “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state” (so-called hold-off), Decrease in appeal power against can be suppressed.

  In the “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state”, the main control CPU 72 expands the range of the hit judgment value corresponding to the normal symbol as compared with the normal time, and also the normal symbol has a variable time for the normal time. It is shorter. For this reason, if the game ball passes through the start gate 20 at a certain frequency while the game is in progress, a hit corresponding to the normal symbol frequently occurs, and as a result, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently set. By actuating (so-called electric Chu support), it is possible to generate a winning (second lottery opportunity) to the right start winning opening at a higher frequency than the “non-time shortening state”. Therefore, if the fluctuation time when the number of working memories becomes 1 or less is made relatively long, it is possible to promote the occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening during that time and to restore the number of working memories.

[Normal (low probability)]
(4) In normal time ("non-time shortened state (low probability state)"), the number of working memories at the start of change corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is less than one and relatively long A variation pattern for setting the variation time is selected. Thereby, the game can be advanced at a certain tempo while executing the so-called “normal fluctuation”. In this embodiment, since it is not assumed that the game ball is fired to the right region in the “non-time shortened state”, it is not necessary to consider the setting of the variation time for the second special symbol.

(5) In normal times, when the number of working memory at the start of fluctuation increases to 2 or more for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern shortened according to the corresponding number of working memories is selected. Is done. As a result, a so-called “short holding time” can be generated to temporarily speed up the game tempo and prevent the fluctuation efficiency (game time efficiency) from being lowered.

[When specific standards are applied]
In FIG. 29B, when the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions” is used, the following features become clear in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the “variable pattern selection table address selection table at the time of a specific condition” is applied in the first special symbol operation memory in the “time reduction state” or “high probability time reduction state” as described above. This is a case where there is no (a specific condition is satisfied).

(6) When the number of working memories of the second special symbol exceeds 1 (2 to 3), a variation pattern for setting a shortened variation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) based on the operation of the variation time shortening function is selected. The Thereby, the starting efficiency of the second special symbol can be increased to advance the game with a good tempo, and the time efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, by making the winning frequency to the right start winning opening by launching the game ball to the right region relatively high, the second lottery opportunity can be generated one after another and the efficiency can be maintained high.

[See two shaded cells]
(7) In addition, even if the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 1 or less (the number of memories is 0 to 1), it will be in “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state” A variation pattern for setting an appropriate shortened variation time is selected (for example, about 1.5 seconds). In this case, even if the working memory of the second special symbol does not remain, the possibility of the first special symbol fluctuating is extremely low if the game ball is fired in the right region, so that the game is cut off. There is nothing. Further, since the operation frequency of the variable start winning device 28 is relatively high due to the operation of the time shortening function, it is expected that the operation memory of the second special symbol will increase relatively early even if the shortening variation is performed. As a result, inadvertently setting a long variation time during the “time reduction state”, the tempo of the game is disturbed, or the upper limit (4) of the number of working memories of the second special symbol while the variation is long It is possible to prevent an overflow winning to the right start winning opening beyond that, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Relative relationship of fluctuation time]
In addition, the following characteristics have been clarified in relation to the variation time in the relative relationship between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or in the relative relationship between the “time shortened state” and the “non-time shortened state” even in the same symbol. .

(1) When the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table”, which is an individual standard for variation display by symbol, is applied, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol exceeds one (predetermined number) The variation time set when the number of working memories is 1 or less is extended (for example, from 1.5 seconds to 12.0 seconds).

(2) When applying the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions”, which is a specific standard for the second special symbol, it is set when the corresponding working memory exceeds one (predetermined number). The variation time is equal to the variation time set when the number of working memories is one or less (both are 1.5 seconds, for example).

(3) Also, when the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is applied, the variation time set for each working memory number for the first special symbol in the “time reduction state” is compared with the “non-time reduction state”. (For example, when the number of working memories is 0, the time is shortened from 12.0 seconds to 6.0 seconds, and when the number of working memories is one, the time is shortened from 12.0 seconds to 1.5 seconds. In the case of 2 to 3 working memories, the time is shortened from 6.0 seconds to 1.5 seconds.)

(4) Similarly, when the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is applied and the number of working memories of the second special symbol exceeds 1 in the “time reduction state”, it is set for each working memory number. The fluctuation time is shortened compared to the “non-time shortened state” (for example, in the case of 2 to 3 working memories, the time is shortened from 6.0 seconds to 1.5 seconds).

(5) However, when the “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” is applied and the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 1 or less in the “time reduction state”, it is set for each working memory number. The variation time is equivalent to the variation time set in the “non-time shortened state” (for example, in the case of 0 to 1 working memories, both are 12.0 seconds).

(6) When applying the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions”, which is a specific reference for the second special symbol, even if the number of working memories is 1 or less, “time reduction The fluctuation time set in the “state” is shortened compared to the fluctuation time set in the “non-time reduction state” (for example, in the case of 0 to 1 working memories, both are 12.0 seconds to 1 Shortened to 5 seconds).

  In any case, due to the features (1) to (6) in the relative relationship of the variation time, the following operation example becomes remarkable particularly in the “time reduction state (including the“ high probability time reduction state ”)”.

[Operation example when individual standards are applied]
FIG. 30 is a time chart showing how the number of working memory at the start of change and the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol change in a state where there is a working memory of the first special symbol. Note that the horizontal axis in FIG. 30 represents the passage of time.

  FIG. 30 (A): For example, a case is assumed where the big hit (10 rounds or 16 rounds) from the “non-time shortened state” ends and the state shifts to the “time shortened state” or the “high probability time shortened state”.

  In FIG. 30, (B): If the number of working memories of the second special symbol has been four so far, the number of working memories at the start of change is 1 at the timing indicated as “start of change 1” in the figure. Subtract one to get three.

  FIG. 30 (C): In this case, as a result of applying the above-mentioned “standard time variation pattern selection table address selection table” in the variation pattern selection table selection process, the second special symbol corresponds to the corresponding number of working memories. A variation time (here, a shortened variation time) is set. Here, it is assumed that the number of working memories is not particularly increased.

In FIG. 30, (B): When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and the condition (starting condition) for starting the next variation display is satisfied, the timing indicated as “variation start 2” in the drawing. Further, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation is subtracted to become two.
In FIG. 30, (C): In this case as well, the variation time shortened according to the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol is set. Thus, in the “time reduction state”, the variation time of the special symbol is basically shortened, so that the game tempo is accelerated and the time efficiency is improved accordingly. Also here, the number of working memories is not particularly increased.

(B) in FIG. 30: When the variation display of the second special symbol is subsequently stopped and the condition for starting the next variation display is satisfied, at the timing indicated by “variation start 3” in the diagram, the variation The starting working memory number is subtracted to be one.
In FIG. 30, (C): In this case, for the second special symbol, a relatively long variation time is set according to the number of working memories.

In FIG. 30, (D): On the other hand, in the “time reduction state”, the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated.
In FIG. 30, (E): In addition, the game ball that is driven into the right area in the game area passes through the operation gate 20 with a relatively high frequency, and the pass detection signal of the gate switch 78 is turned ON each time.

  In FIG. 30, (F): When the passage detection signal of the gate switch 78 is turned ON, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and then stops and displays in a winning manner (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure). timing). During the operation of the normal symbol variation time shortening function, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (from about 12 seconds to about 0.8 seconds in normal time). Further, since the hit determination corresponding to the normal symbol is performed in a high probability state (for example, about 250/251), the normal symbol becomes a hit mode with almost every change.

  In FIG. 30, (G): When the normal symbol is displayed in a winning manner, the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized and the variable start winning device 28 is activated (for example, opened twice for about 2 seconds). As a result, the winning to the right start winning opening becomes easy. The variable start winning device 28 is operated twice, for example, every time the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. As described above, during the operation of the normal symbol variation time shortening function, the normal symbol frequently operates and is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, so that the frequency with which the variable start winning device 28 operates is increased accordingly. I understand.

  In FIG. 30 (H): For this reason, in the “time reduction state”, it is expected that a winning to the right start winning opening will occur with a certain high frequency. In particular, when the number of working memories is 1 or less, the second special symbol fluctuates over a long fluctuation time, so that it is possible to promote the occurrence of winning in the right start winning opening during this time. And when the winning to the right start winning opening occurs continuously during the actual fluctuation display, the working memory number of the second special symbol is recovered (increased) to 2 to 4 (numbers in parentheses in the figure). be able to.

  In FIG. 30, (B): As a result, the second special symbol can be preferentially changed and displayed next time, so that the player can feel secure even if the change time is temporarily long. Can do. In addition, as indicated by “change start 4” in the figure, the number of working memories at the start of change is three at the timing of starting the change display of the next second special symbol. In this case, since the shortened variation time is set according to the number of working memories, high variation efficiency (time efficiency) in the “time shortened state” can be maintained.

[Example of operation when a specific standard is applied]
FIG. 31 is a time chart showing a state in which the number of working memories at the start of change and the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special symbol change in a state where there is no working memory of the first special symbol.

  In FIG. 31, (A): Similarly, the case where the big hit (10 rounds or 16 rounds) from the “non-time shortened state” ends and the state shifts to the “time shortened state” or “high probability time shortened state”. Suppose.

  In FIG. 31, (B): If the number of working memories of the second special symbol has been three so far, the number of working memories at the start of change is 1 at the timing indicated as “start of change 1” in the figure. Subtract one to get two.

  In FIG. 31, (C): In this case, as a result of applying the “variation pattern selection table address selection table at the time of the specific condition” in the variation pattern selection table selection process, the second special symbol has a corresponding number of working memories. A corresponding variation time (here, a shortened variation time) is set.

In FIG. 31, (B): When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and the condition for starting the next variation display (starting condition) is satisfied, at the timing indicated as “variation start 2” in the drawing. Further, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation is subtracted to become one.
In FIG. 31, (C): In this case, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol is one or less, but “time reduction state” is achieved by applying the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions”. The shortening variation time suitable for the is set. Therefore, when there is no working memory of the first special symbol, in the “time shortened state”, the variation time of the second special symbol is basically shortened regardless of the number of working memories, so the fluctuation efficiency (time efficiency) is kept high. can do. Here, the number of working memories is not particularly increased.

In FIG. 31, (B): When the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped and the condition for starting the next variation display is satisfied, at the timing indicated as “variation start 3” in the diagram, the variation The starting working memory number is subtracted to zero.
In FIG. 31, (C): Also in this case, the shortening variation time is continuously set for the second special symbol. Accordingly, if there is no working memory of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is basically shortened even if the number of working memories does not remain in the “time shortening state”. ) Can be kept high. Note that the number of working memories does not increase here either.

In FIG. 31, (D): On the other hand, in the “time reduction state”, the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated.
In FIG. 31, (E): The game ball driven into the right area within the game area passes through the operation gate 20 with a relatively high frequency, and the pass detection signal of the gate switch 78 is turned ON each time.

  In FIG. 31, (F): When the passage detection signal of the gate switch 78 is turned ON, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and then stops and displays in a hit state (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure). timing).

  In FIG. 31, (G): When the normal symbol is displayed in a winning manner, the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized, and the variable start winning device 28 is activated (for example, opened twice for about 2 seconds). As a result, the winning to the right start winning opening becomes easy.

  In FIG. 31, (H): For this reason, in the “time reduction state”, it is expected that a winning to the right start winning opening occurs with a certain high frequency. As a result, the detection signal of the right start winning opening switch 82 is turned ON with the actual winning (time t1), and the operation memory is generated.

  In FIG. 31, (B): When a working memory is generated by winning at the right start winning opening, the working memory is consumed at the timing indicated as “variation start 4” in the figure, and one generated in the control. The working memory is subtracted at the start of the change to zero.

In FIG. 31, (C): Also in this case, the shortening variation time is continuously set for the second special symbol.
In FIG. 31, (H): During this time, the game ball is fired to the right area, and accordingly, the winning to the right starting winning opening occurs with the operation of the variable starting winning apparatus 28 (the right starting winning opening switch 82 When the detection signal is ON), the number of working memories of the second special symbol increases to one.

  In FIG. 31, (B): When the previous fluctuation is stopped and the next start condition is satisfied, the working memory is consumed at the timing indicated as “fluctuation start 5” in the figure, and the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation. Is subtracted to zero again.

(C) in FIG. 31: Similarly, the shortening variation time is continuously set for the second special symbol.
In FIG. 31, (H): After this, the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, but the game ball is continuously fired to the right area, and a winning to the right starting winning opening occurs again (right The detection signal of the start winning a prize opening switch 82 is ON), and the operation memory of the second special symbol is generated (time t2).

In FIG. 31, (B): When the operation memory is generated, the operation memory is consumed at the timing indicated as “variation start 6” in the figure, and the operation memory number at the start of the variation is subtracted to become 0 again.
In FIG. 31, (C): Similarly, the shortening variation time is continuously set for the second special symbol.

  Similarly, when the next operation memory occurs (time t3), the shortened variation time is set and the second special symbol varies ("variation start 7"). Thereafter, while the number of working memories increases appropriately, the working memory is efficiently consumed due to the shortening variation, so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed at a good tempo in the shortened variation time.

According to this embodiment, the following advantages are remarkable.
(1) In the “time reduction state” or “high probability time reduction state”, the variation pattern selection table address selection table of the second special symbol depending on the presence or absence of the number of working memories of the first special symbol (FIGS. 24 and 25) Can be used properly. As a result, the table (FIG. 25) applied only to the second special symbol does not require a data row corresponding to the first special symbol, and the data capacity can be reduced accordingly.

(2) Also, in the “time shortening state” or “high probability time shortening state”, the number of working memories of the first special symbol is checked, and the variation pattern selection table address selection table is switched to optimize the second special symbol. Can be determined.
(3) Specifically, when there is working memory of the first special symbol, in order not to consume the working memory of the first special symbol which is not prioritized, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol is one or less. In this case, a relatively long variation time can be set.
On the other hand, when there is no working memory of the first special symbol, a shortened variation time can be set regardless of the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol.

(4) In this way, by switching the variation pattern selection table address selection table according to the situation, the game area is launched in the right area in the “time reduction state” or “high probability time reduction state” as in this embodiment. In the gameability specified for the position, it is possible to achieve both the treatment (care) for preventing fluctuation of the first special symbol which is not preferred and the maximum high-speed digestion by “right-handed”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the “time reduction state”, the game ball is fired (so-called “right-handed”) in such a manner that the game ball flows down in the right region in the game region, so that the start gate 20 is reached. Normal symbol variation and winning stop display due to the passing of the game ball, operation of the variable start winning device 28, occurrence of winning at the right start winning opening, generation of working memory corresponding to the second special symbol, and second special A flow such as fluctuation of the second special symbol due to the consumption of the working memory of the symbol can be generated smoothly. In particular, when the variation pattern is determined by applying the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions” when displaying the variation of the second special symbol, the variation time is set to be shortened overall regardless of the number of working memories. Therefore, the above flow can be generated in a short cycle.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls (second privilege) for winning at the right starting winning opening is larger than the number of winning balls (first privilege) for winning at the middle starting winning opening 26 as described above. It is set less. As a result, even if the above cycle is shortened to a certain extent, the increase in the number of prize balls due to winning in the right starting prize opening becomes excessive (for example, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shots exceeds 100%). It is possible to balance the consumption of game balls and the improvement of game efficiency at a high level.

  Or conversely, it is good also as setting the number of winning balls (2nd privilege) with respect to winning to a right starting winning opening compared with the number of winning balls (1st privilege) with respect to winning at the middle start winning opening 26. . In this case, in the above-described shortened cycle, the player can enjoy the benefits of winning a prize ball by winning the right start winning opening, thereby providing more diverse game playability.

  It should be noted that the various values and fluctuation times listed so far are all preferable examples, and it goes without saying that the values and fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the list of FIG. 29, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation time set for each state and the number of working memories is an example, and even if a variation time other than the illustration is set, Good.

[Other setting examples in standard time]
In FIG. 29 (A), an example in which the same variation time is set for the case where the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 and the case of 1 is given. It is also possible to make a difference in the setting of the fluctuation time. For example, a longer variation time (for example, 15.0 seconds) may be set when the number of operation memories is zero. As a result, it is possible to further increase the grace time until the working memory of the first special symbol is changed after the working memory of the first special symbol is changed and to increase the number of working memories of the second special symbol.

[Other setting examples under specific conditions]
In FIG. 29 (B), the example which sets the variation time common to all the cases where the working memory of the 2nd special symbol is 0-3 is given, for example, when there are 2-3 working memories. Further, a shortened variation time (for example, 1.0 second) may be set.

  Moreover, although the example which sets the same fluctuation | variation time with the case where the action | operation memory of a 2nd special symbol is 0 here and one piece is given here, the fluctuation | variation time of the case where it is zero and one piece is given. Differences can also be made in the settings. For example, when the number of operation memories is 0, the variation time may be 1.5 seconds, and when the number is 1, the variation time may be 1.2 seconds (variation time shorter than the case of 1). In this case, the variation time can be set to 1.2 seconds (variation time shorter than the case of one) in the case of two and three operation memories. Thereby, the improvement of the time efficiency in the “time reduction state” can be further promoted.

  Alternatively, in (B) of FIG. 29, only when the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0, a long variation time (for example, 2.5 seconds) compared to other cases (1 to 3 working memories). ) May be set. That is, even if there is no concern that the first special symbol will fluctuate under these conditions, the second special symbol will stop changing in a relatively short fluctuation time (1.5 seconds) without increasing the working memory of the second special symbol. If this happens, the frequency of the change waiting state (a state in which none of the symbols change) increases. Therefore, when the number of working memories becomes zero, by setting a slightly longer variation time than in other cases, the frequency of occurrence of a non-variable state is suppressed low, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable or frustrated. can do.

[See Fig. 21: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above is the flow of processing of the main control CPU 72 in the “out of time” including the case of shifting to the “time reduction state” or the “high probability state” after the big hit occurrence before the big hit occurrence. During this time, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 21) each time the procedure of the deviation variation pattern determination processing (FIG. 22) is completed. After returning, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to a special symbol variation start process (step S2415 in FIG. 21).

  The control procedure when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning) is as described above. However, when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Perform the following steps: First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types of breakdown are “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 1a”, “16 round probability variation 1b”, “16 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “30”, “50”, “15”, “5” is the denominator. Is equivalent to the ratio when 100 is 100. In the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 15/100 (= 15%), and the ratio that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%. In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the allocation value for “16 round probability variation 3” is not set.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H02H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. In addition, in the case of any of “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “30”, “10”, “5”, “5”. , “50” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is It is 10/100 (= 10%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. Furthermore, the ratio at which “16 round probability variation 3” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “04H”, and “05H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H02H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. The other time reduction times are the same as in the case of a big hit with the first special symbol.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the working memory for. In this case, if you raise the selection ratio of “3 per 16 rounds probable big change” for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win “3 per 16 rounds probable big hit” than usual, so that will increase the player's profit accordingly This is because there is an advantage of being able to.

  Based on the above, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the “time shortening state (including the“ high probability time shortening state ”)”, if there is a working memory of the first special symbol, as described above, the “variation pattern at the standard time” By applying the “selection table address selection table”, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long to promote the accumulation of the operation memory of the second special symbol, while the operation memory of the first special symbol is stored. If there is not, the “variation pattern selection table address selection table under specific conditions” is applied to keep the variation efficiency high.

[See Fig. 21: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 10-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “81” to “86” correspond to the variation pattern (a variation pattern that satisfies a specific reach occurrence condition) that is a hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “101” to “106” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 21: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or In the case of any one of “16 round probability variation symbols 3”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state setting means). Further, when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a gaming state flag (low probability state setting means). .

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 In the case of either “Round Probability Variation 2” or “16 Round Probability Variation 3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state) Transition means, time shortening function actuating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 20: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 21). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 21), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 21).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 20) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “10 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the value indicating “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. The Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 21). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. . The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count-down counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 12) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “10 rounds (10R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 20). The interval time between rounds is any one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” or “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. However, it is set to about 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds, for example. However, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16-round probability variation 1” or “16-round probability variation 2” is the scale for the continuous round judgment production (treasure challenge production). In order to ensure, it can be set relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds). Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 21). Specifically, if the major category “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. Further, if “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored as a corresponding value on the program (“9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time easily occurs in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during one opening. Sufficient time (for example, a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is that even if it is not possible to enter the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening during one opening, It is a short time (which becomes difficult) that hardly occurs (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the shooting interval of the game balls by the shooting control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management processing (FIG. 40).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the time of big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 41) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 41).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is able to win the variable variable prize at the big hit. Return to the end address of the device management process (FIG. 40). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the “number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened multiple times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize closing closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 40), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (10 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Further, during the countdown of the big hit end time timer, the main control CPU 72 generates an end time command. The command command during the end time is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The “end time command” is a command indicating that the end time of the jackpot game is in progress.

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 40).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 21) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 70 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 21) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times or 100 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 20) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening the first big prize opening to, for example, two, based on the big prize opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and such an opening time is a ball entering the first big prize opening during one opening. Is a short time (which becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 45). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 46) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-described small hitting big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 46).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 45). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 46). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 45) is the next jump destination large winning opening / closing operation process at the small hit. Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 20) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, if [F2] “10 round normal symbol” big hit hits, [F3] 10 round big hit game (battle bonus) will be executed, [F4] defeated in the battle of big role effect [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In normal mode, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (battle bonus) or 16 round real 10 round jackpot game if it hits a jackpot of [F7] “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Battle Bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins the battle of the big role production.

  Then, after the end of the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge effect is executed, but [F10] failure effect is executed, and [F11] fireworks rush is entered. [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state.

  On the other hand, in [F1] normal mode, when [F12] “16 round probability variation 2” big hit, [F3] 16 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, [F8] win.

  After the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge production is executed, [F13] success production is executed, [F14] After 11th to 16th rounds, [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

Although not shown in particular, if it is a big hit of “16 round probability variation 3” in [F1] normal mode, [F5] coast mode, [F11] fireworks rush, a 16 round big hit game (special festival bonus) It is executed and shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 51 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
51 (A): For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of (A) in FIG. 51, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “10 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
51 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means, production execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 51 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 51, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 51, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number is three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 51 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 51 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 52 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”. . Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 Any aspect of the round probability variation pattern 1 or 2 (for example, 7-segment LED “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc. ) Until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). Note that, in FIG. 52, each effect symbol is simplified and shown only with numerals. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 52 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
FIG. 52B: Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is positioned in front of the effect symbol that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 52C, after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 52 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 52 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 52 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. In addition, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expected degree of probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 52, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group and passes through the screen diagonally. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of super reach production (specific reach production execution means)]
In FIG. 52 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 52 (H): When the super reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it has been split into a close-up and the character emits some dialogue (or silent (This may be a content of smiling at the event). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 52 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, but the type of winning symbol is not For example, an effect that tells the player that this time corresponds to either “a normal big hit or a probable big hit” this time by stopping and displaying an effect symbol representing “5” in the center of the screen while making the disclosure. Has been done.

  In FIG. 52 (J): For example, a confirmed stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the confirmed stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, “whether it is a promising big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit)” can be made undisclosed to the player. .

  In the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, the winning type will not be disclosed after the end of the big hit game, but “16 round probability variable symbol 3” In the case of, the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “16 round probability variation 3” is internally applied, an even number of production symbols are stopped and displayed, and “7” production symbols are stopped and displayed due to another change (for example, a re-lottery production). There is an effect of promoting to “probable change”, or in the stop display effect, even-numbered effect symbols are stopped and displayed and promoted to “probability” in the effect during the big hit game.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of directorial performance (battle bonus and treasure challenge)]
FIGS. 53 to 63 are partial examples of effects of the big role effect that are executed when any of the “10-round normal symbol”, “10-round probability variation symbol”, and “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2” are met. FIG.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is performed in the big role production (battle bonus), and “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 rounds” In the case of “probability pattern 1, 2”, an effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
53 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

  Here, the first variable winning device 30 is operating. Further, the middle lamp 320 has moved to a position next to the first variable winning device 30. The middle lamp 320 is in a light emitting state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable prize winning device 30 is also in a light emitting state. The rear lamp 330 has also moved to a position next to the first variable prize-winning device 30, but in this state, the rear lamp 330 cannot be visually recognized because it is hidden behind the middle lamp 320.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 53 (B): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 54 (C): When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 54 (D): In the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella gives out a special technique that makes the long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with “10 round normal symbol”, and if the female character wins, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” It means that one of them was a big hit.

[6th round (when 10th round normal symbol wins)]
(E) in FIG. 55: In the case of winning with the 10th round normal symbol, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).

[7th round (10 rounds when normal symbol is selected)]
FIG. 55 (F): In the case of winning in the 10th round normal symbol, the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. Note that the re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed in the eighth to tenth rounds of the big hit game.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 55 (G): At the timing when the big hit game with 10 rounds of normal symbols ends (during the end processing), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  Here, the operation of the first variable winning device 30 is finished. Further, the middle lamp 320 has moved to the retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in the off state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable winning device 30 is also in the off state.

[6th round (at the time of winning the 10th round)
In FIG. 56 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

  Here, the first variable winning device 30 continues to operate. Further, the middle lamp 320 has moved to a position next to the first variable winning device 30. The middle lamp 320 is in a light emitting state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable prize winning device 30 is also in a light emitting state.

[Round 7]
In FIG. 56 (I): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a blessing effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “I did it well!” Is executed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player that he has won the battle production.

[10th round]
In FIG. 57 (J): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the blessing effect starting from the seventh round is continued until the tenth round. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which a female character performing a peace sign emits the line “I did it!”.

[Treasure challenge production]
In FIG. 57 (K): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a treasure challenge effect is executed after 10 rounds have ended. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character raises the rear lamp 330, and if the rear lamp 330 can be raised, six substantial jackpot rounds are added. The treasure challenge effect is composed of a determination effect as to whether or not the rear lamp 330 moves to the end position (second proximity position), and a result output effect that executes a success effect or a failure effect following the determination effect. Yes. The treasure challenge production is executed at the end time after the 10th round is completed in the case of winning with the “10th round probability variation symbol”, and in the case of “16th round probability variation symbol 1, 2” the tenth round. And the interval time between the 11th round.

  Here, the operation of the first variable winning device 30 is finished. Further, the middle lamp 320 is stopped at a position beside the first variable winning device 30. The middle lamp 320 is turned off, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable winning device 30 is also turned off.

[Decision effect]
Further, from this point of time, the determination effect as to whether or not the rear lamp 330 moves to the end position (second proximity position) is started. However, in this state, since the rear lamp 330 is hidden behind the middle lamp 320, the player cannot visually recognize the rear lamp 330.

[Game description production]
58 (L): When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “If you raise the rear lamp, you can add a round!”.

  In FIG. 58 (M): When the game explanation effect ends, an item provision effect in which the female character provides an item is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a female character straddling a horse takes out an item (food) is executed.

  (N) in FIG. 58: Then, an effect is performed in which the horse character eats the food provided by the female character. At this time, for example, depending on the type of item to be provided, the reliability of success or failure in the treasure challenge effect can be varied.

  In FIG. 59, (O): The screen is switched, the sharp eyes of the horse character are displayed, and the characters “Ready” are displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 59 (P): The characters “GO!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and it is instructed that the directing effect of the effect switching button 45 has been started. In addition, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the lapse of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, all the eight square time meters are displayed as colored images, so that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  Further, in the illustrated example, an effect is performed as if the stretchable string tied to the horse character is connected to the rear lamp 330 via the rotating body.

  In FIG. 59 (Q): It is assumed that the player has started striking the effect switching button 45 in response to the effect prompting the player to press the effect switching button 45. Then, the horse character begins to step on the foot in response to repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45, and the effect of gradually moving to the left is executed. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

  In FIG. 60 (R): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the vicinity of the center. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

  In FIG. 60 (S): Continuous hitting of the effect switching button 45 is continued by the player. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the left end of the screen. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

  In FIG. 60 (T): When the repetitive striking effect of the effect switching button 45 has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is displayed that is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the character image is split into a large image. . In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[When winning 16 rounds probable symbol 2]
In FIG. 61 (U): In the case of winning with “16-round probability variation 2”, a successful production (result output production) in the treasure challenge production is executed. Specifically, after being tied to the end of the string pulled by the horse character, the lamp 330 is raised, and an effect in which a plurality of treasures jump out vigorously is executed.

  Here, the rear lamp 330 has moved to a position next to the second variable winning device 31. The rear lamp 330 is in the light emitting state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable prize winning device 31 is also in the light emitting state.

  In the illustrated example, the rear lamp 330 is suddenly raised. However, the rear lamp 330 may be finely moved up and down to produce an effect that indicates whether the rear lamp 330 is raised. . Such effects can be realized by frequently rotating the lamp motor 512 forward and backward.

  In FIG. 61 (V): A character “success” is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Fantastic!”. Such a successful effect corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, and a predetermined random number lottery (for example, 1/10) executed when the button is pressed once within the button effective time. When winning in the random number lottery to be won), it is executed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) within the button effective time or when the button effective time elapses.

[Eleventh round]
In FIG. 61 (W): When the interval time between the tenth and eleventh rounds ends, the eleventh round is started. The eleventh and subsequent rounds are positioned as special rounds, and character information of “special round” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

  From here, the second variable winning device 31 operates. Further, the rear lamp 330 has moved to a position next to the second variable winning device 31. The rear lamp 330 is in the light emitting state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable prize winning device 31 is also in the light emitting state.

[12th round]
In FIG. 62 (X): Special round effects are continued in the 12th round as well. In the illustrated example, a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[16th round]
In FIG. 62 (Y): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the special rounds are displayed. A unique effect image is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 62 (Z): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  Here, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is finished. Further, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 have moved to the retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in the off state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable winning device 31 is also in the off state.

[At the time of winning 10-round probability variation symbol or 16-round probability variation symbol 1]
FIG. 63 (a): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, a failure rendering (result output rendering) in the treasure challenge rendering is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a string pulled by a horse character breaks in the middle.

  In this case, the rear lamp 330 does not rise. The middle lamp 320 is turned off, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable winning device 30 is also turned off.

  In FIG. 63 (b): The character “failure” is displayed at the top of the screen, and the effect that the character of the hermit emits the speech “sorry” is executed. Such failure production is executed by using a part of the end time in the case of winning with “10th round probability variation symbol”, and from the 11th round in the case of winning with “16th round probability variation symbol 1”. It is executed using the fast opening time up to the 16th round. In addition, from the 11th round to the 16th round when winning in “16 round probability variation 1”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened 6 times, but since the opening time is set extremely short, The profit by is hardly obtained.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 63, (c): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  Here, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are not operating. Further, the middle lamp 320 has moved to the retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in the off state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable winning device 30 is also in the off state.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 64 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode that is shifted to after a big hit game when either of the “10 round probability variation symbols” or “16 round probability variation symbols 1, 2, 3” corresponds to a big hit. Fireworks rush is a state with high probability time reduction. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 64 (A): For example, the first variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game, so that the variation display of the effect symbols is performed in the “fireworks rush” state. Here, an example is given in which the working memory of the first special symbol does not remain before the start of the jackpot game, but even if the working memory of the first special symbol remains, the special symbol after the jackpot game ends. If the working memory of the second special symbol is accumulated before the change display of the second special symbol becomes possible, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed from the first time.

  In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  Further, in the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, all the markers M1 are not displayed, but one marker M2 is lit up. Thereby, although there is no working memory of the first special symbol at the present time, it is shown in production that there is one working memory of the second special symbol.

  In this case, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be shortened on the control by the main control CPU 72 as described above, the effect corresponding to the particularly long variation time is not executed, and the shortening using the effect symbol The production at the time of change is executed.

  During the fireworks rush, the high probability time is shortened, and the game ball is launched toward the right area in the game area. During this time, as the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, so that the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than the low probability non-time shortened state. However, since the winning to the right start winning opening has not occurred, the display of the marker M2 indicating the number of working memories of the second special symbol is not changed.

  Here, the variable start winning device 28 is operating. Further, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 stand by at a retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in a light emitting state, and the first effect lamp (LED) built in the variable start winning device 28 is also in a light emitting state.

  In FIG. 64 (B): Since the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  Also, here, since the winning to the right start winning opening has not occurred, the display of the marker M2 indicating the number of working memories of the second special symbol has not changed.

  (C) in FIG. 64: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. During this time, similarly, the control time by the main control CPU 72 is set so that the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened. Therefore, the effect corresponding to the particularly long variation time is not executed, and the effect at the time of the shortening variation using the effect symbol is not executed. The production will be executed.

  Here, an example is shown in which no winning at the right start winning opening has occurred, but when a winning at the right starting winning opening occurs, an image of the marker M2 representing the number of working memories of the second special symbol is stored. Displayed according to the number.

FIG. 65 to FIG. 68 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when winning or losing in the fireworks rush.
The following effect examples are effect examples that are executed when a big hit is made in the fireworks rush or when a loss reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 65, (A): The effect symbols are displayed in a “fireworks rush” state. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 65 (B): For example, an effect is produced in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  65 (C): For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 66 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 66, (E): This time, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the drum is performed. In this effect example, an effect of fighting an enemy character using a drum is executed, but an effect of fighting an enemy character using a fan, for example, can also be executed. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed by changing the weapon used for a battle.

  In FIG. 66 (F): An effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  In FIG. 67 (G): Next to this, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 67 (H): When the change of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully avoids the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 67, (I): When the panda character is displayed in large size and the female character is displayed in small size together with the characters “defeated...”, It is transmitted to the player that the player is not selected. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  67 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the fireworks rush continues, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush.

[When winning]
In FIG. 67 (K): On the other hand, if this special symbol variation hits a big hit, the panda character will wave, causing an explosion that will cause the panda character to fly far away. Executed.

  In FIG. 67 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  67 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion opportunity promotion]
In FIG. 68, (N): When there are three production symbols, the big win is decided there, but the size of the profit (out-going ball) obtained by the big hit game is determined (the number of rounds is determined). Promotion chance production is executed.
In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the promotion chance effect will be started from now, and the player may be promoted from “2 effect design” to “7 effect design”.

  In FIG. 68, (O): The effect pattern in which the three lined effect symbols are displayed gradually smaller and the effect line in which the three lined effect symbols are sucked into the back side of the screen while rotating is executed.

  In FIG. 68 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion chance failure production]
In FIG. 68 (Q): If the promotion chance effect fails, that is, if it falls under either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the promotion chance failure rendering is Executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “2”).

  In FIG. 68, (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”. Thereafter, the above-described battle bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 68 (S): On the other hand, when the promotion chance effect is successful, that is, when it corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3”, the promotion chance success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  In FIG. 68 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol almost in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the “16-round probability variable symbol 3”. After that, a special festival bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen that is a big hit of 16 rounds.

[Director-in-chief production (special festival bonus production)]
FIG. 69 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. This big role production is executed, for example, when a success production is executed in the above promotion chance production.

[1 round]
In FIG. 69 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game is being executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, characters of “Special Festival Bonus” are displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and images about festivals such as “Uchiwa” and “Taiko” are displayed around the screen.

  The first variable winning device 30 operates from the first round to the tenth round in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. Further, the middle lamp 320 has moved to a position next to the first variable winning device 30. The middle lamp 320 is in a light emitting state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable prize winning device 30 is also in a light emitting state.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 69 (B): After that, when the big hit game has proceeded smoothly and the final 16 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

  The second variable winning device 31 operates from the 11th round to the 16th round in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. Further, the rear lamp 330 has moved to a position next to the second variable winning device 31. The rear lamp 330 is in the light emitting state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable prize winning device 31 is also in the light emitting state.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 69, (C): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush state with a high probability time reduction state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  Here, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is finished. Further, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 have moved to the retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in the off state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable winning device 31 is also in the off state.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 70 is a continuous diagram illustrating an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a mode that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of the “10 round normal symbol”. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 70 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “10 round normal symbol” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. Yes. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  Here, the variable start winning device 28 is operating. Further, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 stand by at a retracted position on the back side of the front lamp 310. The front lamp 310 is in a light emitting state, and the first effect lamp (LED) built in the variable start winning device 28 is also in a light emitting state.

  In FIG. 70, (B): Since the current variation (during non-winning) has ended, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 70: Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state is entered. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

[Gameability using a lamp unit]
FIG. 71 is a continuous diagram showing game play using a lamp unit.
In this embodiment, when winning with any probability variation symbol, the player enters a fireworks rush that is in a state of high probability time reduction. And if it corresponds to "16 round probability variation 2" or "16 round probability variation 3" in this fireworks rush, (1) time shortening state → (2) first half jackpot game by the first variable winning device 30 → (3 ) The game progresses step by step, such as the second half jackpot game by the second variable winning device 31. In this embodiment, the lamp unit 300 is also operated step by step as the game progresses step by step. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 71, (A): In the fireworks rush that is in the high probability time shortened state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state, so the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. At this time, the front lamp 310 is in a light emitting state, and the first effect lamp (LED) built in the variable start winning device 28 is also in a light emitting state. For this reason, it can be transmitted intuitively and intelligibly that it is only necessary to launch the game ball aiming at the variable start winning device 28. This also applies to the coast mode, which is a low probability time shortening state.

  In FIG. 71 (B): The first variable winning device 30 operates from the first round to the tenth round of the big hit game. At this time, the middle lamp 320 rises to the intermediate position and enters the light emitting state, and the second effect lamp (LED) built in the first variable prize winning device 30 also enters the light emitting state. For this reason, it is possible to intuitively and easily convey to the player that the game ball has only to be launched aiming at the first variable winning device 30.

  71 (C): The second variable winning device 31 operates from the 11th round to the 16th round of the jackpot game. At this time, the rear lamp 330 is raised to the end position to be in a light emitting state, and the third effect lamp (LED) built in the second variable winning device 31 is also in a light emitting state. For this reason, it is possible to intuitively and easily convey to the player that the game ball has only to be launched aiming at the second variable winning device 31.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the player is aimed in the order of 1st (variable start winning device 28) to 2nd (first variable winning device 30) and 3rd (second variable winning device 31). Accordingly, it is possible to clarify the purpose consciousness of the game property that the player can enter the state where the most profit can be obtained if 3rd (second variable winning device 31) can be reached. In addition, the player can be further improved in expectation by executing an effect dedicated to continuing the round (treasure challenge effect) using the lamp unit 300.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big-time effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, an end time command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable prize. The content of the effect at the time of the opening / closing operation | movement of the apparatus 31 is controlled (effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal for causing the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 to emit light to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 via the lamp unit connection board 58 (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.). The front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 can emit light in various scenes during the game. For example, during a big hit game, a high probability time shortened state, a low probability time shortened state, a pattern change, etc. Can emit light.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  In other processes, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the lamp unit 300. The lamp unit 300 operates using the lamp motor 512 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently. The lamp unit 300 can be moved in various scenes during a game. For example, the lamp unit 300 can be moved during a big hit game, a high probability time shortened state, a low probability time shortened state, a symbol change, or the like.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 72).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 20) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 20). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 10 rounds of big hit, the production control CPU 126 selects a big role production pattern of 10 rounds of big win as the production contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the production display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 72) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 72). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 51B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. In addition, when the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 64A) with a firework motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 70A) with the coast as a motif. Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 74), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. If the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to a super reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the super reach effect (specific reach effect execution means), and the change pattern command is a reach other than the super reach effect. In the case of a command corresponding to an effect (normal reach effect or long reach effect), the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to a reach effect other than the super reach effect (the same applies hereinafter).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a reach effect is executed in the coast mode, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG. 52 and the like is executed.

  And after finishing the process of step S804, step S806, or step S808, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 75).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 70 or the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG.

  And after finishing the process of step S854, step S856, or step S858, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 75).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S752), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754), variable winning device operating processing (step S756), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S758). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S752: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S754 to S758) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operating pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S756) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S758) as the next jump destination.

  Step S754: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game (determination effect executing means, result output effect executing means). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S756: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (a treasure challenge effect) during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the effect contents according to the result. The control information of (button effect) is instruct | indicated with respect to display control CPU146.

  Step S758: In the post-operation of the variable prize apparatus, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transition destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable prize device. Specifically, in the case of winning with “10-round probability variation symbol” and “16-round probability variation symbol 1-3”, the production control CPU 126 produces an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered ((Z) in FIG. 62). For example, the effect shown in (G) in FIG. 55) is selected in the case of winning with “10 round normal symbol”. Execute the process.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable winning device operating pre-process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S908. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. To do.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S904.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation 2”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 2”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation 2” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the stop symbol command, and confirms whether or not the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variable symbol 3”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16-round probability variation 3” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S926. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S928.

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a battle defeat effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an effect (the effect shown in (E) in FIGS. 53 to 55) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the battle effect.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a re-challenge promotion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an effect (the effect shown in FIG. 55F) that prompts the player to challenge the battle effect again.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a battle victory effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for executing an effect (an effect shown in FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 56, and FIG. 57 (J)) in which the friend character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. Execute the process.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a determination effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the determination effect (the effect shown in FIG. 57 (K) and FIGS. 58 to 60) in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a failure effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a failure effect (effects shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B) in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a battle victory effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for executing an effect (an effect shown in FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 56, and FIG. 57 (J)) in which the friend character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. Execute the process.

  Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a determination effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the determination effect (the effect shown in FIG. 57 (K) and FIGS. 58 to 60) in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a successful effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a successful effect (effects shown in (U) and (V) in FIG. 61) in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S924: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special round effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns for executing special round effects (effects shown in (W) in FIG. 61, (X) and (Y) in FIG. 61) from the 11th round to the 16th round. Execute the process.

  Step S926: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special festival bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a special festival bonus effect (effect shown in FIG. 69) from the first round to the 16th round.

Step S928: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the small hit effect executed during the small hit game.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operation processing (FIG. 78).

[Lamp drive processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the lamp driving process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S760: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time shortening state (a high probability time shortening state or a low probability time shortening state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S766, and if the internal state is not the time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S762.

  Step S762: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the first to the tenth rounds. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the round number command, and checks whether or not the round number commands corresponding to the first to tenth rounds are stored. .

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current number of rounds is the first round to the tenth round (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S770, and the current round number is the first round to the tenth round. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S764.

  Step S764: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current game status is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round”.

  Here, the specific interval time is the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds when it corresponds to the 16-round probability variation pattern 2, and within the button effective time in the above treasure challenge production After winning a predetermined random number lottery executed when a button is pressed once (for example, a random number lottery winning at 1/10), the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) within the button effective time. Or after the button effective time has elapsed. These can be confirmed by a stop symbol command, a round number command, presence / absence of operation of the effect button by the player, and the like.

  The “specific eleventh round to the specific sixteenth round” refers to the eleventh round to the sixteenth round in the case of “16th round probability variation 2” or “16th round probability variation 3”. Therefore, the 11th to 16th rounds in the case of “16th round probability variation 1” are not included in the “specific 11th round to the specific 16th round”. That is, “the specific eleventh round to the specific sixteenth round” indicates a round in which the second variable winning device 31 is long open. These can be confirmed by a stop symbol command, a round number command, or the like.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game status is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S774, When it is not possible to confirm that the current game situation is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S778.

  Step S766: The effect control CPU 126 executes a front lamp lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a light emission control signal to the front lamp 310.

  Step S768: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first effect lamp lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for light emission to the first effect lamp 181 built in the variable start winning device 28.

  Step S770: The effect control CPU 126 executes middle lamp lighting pattern selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for light emission to the middle lamp 320.

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 executes a second effect lamp lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for light emission to the second effect lamp 182 built in the first variable prize winning device 30.

  Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 executes a rear lamp lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a light emission control signal to the rear lamp 330.

  Step S776: The effect control CPU 126 executes a third effect lamp lighting pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for light emission to the third effect lamp 183 built in the second variable winning device 31.

  Step S778: The effect control CPU 126 executes various lamp lighting pattern selection processes. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting control signals for light emission and extinction to various lamps, panel lamps, and the like via the lamp driving circuit 132. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal for turning off the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, the rear lamp 330, the first effect lamp 181, the second effect lamp 182, and the third effect lamp 183. Execute the process.

  Then, when any of the processes of step S768, step S772, step S776, or step S778 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 72).

[Other processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of other processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S780: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the number of rounds of the big hit game currently being performed is the first to the tenth rounds. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the round number command, and checks whether or not the round number commands corresponding to the first to tenth rounds are stored. .

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current round number is the first round to the tenth round (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S786, and the current round number is the first round to the tenth round. If this cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S782.

Step S782: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current game situation is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round”.
The “specific interval time” and the “specific eleventh round to the specific sixteenth round” are as described above.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game status is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S788, When it is not possible to confirm that the current game status is “specific interval time” or “specific 11th round to specific 16th round” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S784.

  Step S784: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current game situation is in the middle of the big hit game end time. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether or not the command is stored during the end time, thereby determining whether or not the end time of the big hit game is in progress. Can be confirmed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game situation is in the middle of the end time of the jackpot game (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S790, and the current game state is the end time of the jackpot game. When it cannot be confirmed that the process is in progress (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S792.

  Step S786: The effect control CPU 126 executes a lamp motor intermediate position drive pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for raising the rear lamp 330 to the intermediate position with respect to the driving IC of the lamp motor 512. As a result, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 rise to the intermediate position.

  Step S788: The effect control CPU 126 executes a lamp motor end position drive pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for raising the rear lamp 330 to the end position with respect to the driving IC of the lamp motor 512. As a result, the middle lamp 320 remains in the intermediate position, and the rear lamp 330 rises to the end position.

  Step S790: The effect control CPU 126 executes a lamp motor start position drive pattern selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of outputting a control signal for lowering the rear lamp 330 to the starting end position with respect to the driving IC of the lamp motor 512. Accordingly, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are lowered to the start position.

  Step S792: The effect control CPU 126 executes other motor drive pattern selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal for moving the movable body 40 f to the driving IC of the movable body motor 57.

  Then, when any one of steps S786 to S792 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 72).

  Thus, according to this embodiment, when the opening / closing operation by the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is executed, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are moved from the start position to the intermediate position. Move to the end position. Therefore, it can be clearly communicated (implicitly suggested) to the player that the opening / closing operation by the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is executed.

  And in this embodiment, since the launch position of the game ball is taught by the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 which are three-dimensional structures, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the launch position of the game ball. Can communicate.

  In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing operation by the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is executed, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 also emits light, and the medium lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 also emit light. For this reason, in addition to the movement by the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330, the light emission by the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 functions synergistically, and the launch position of the game ball is transmitted intuitively and easily. can do.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the movable body is not provided for the variable start winning device 28, the number of movable bodies can be reduced as compared with the case where the movable body is provided for all winning devices. The drive mechanism can be simplified accordingly.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there are two variable winning devices such as the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and the movable body is also the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp corresponding to the two variable winning devices. Two such as 330 are prepared.

  For this reason, even if the variable winning device operating in one big hit game is switched as in the present embodiment, the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 are moved corresponding to the two variable winning devices, It is possible to clearly communicate to the player which variable winning device to which the game ball should be fired.

  In the present embodiment, both the variable start winning device 28 and the front lamp 310 indicate that the opening / closing operation by the variable start winning device 28 is performed by light emission. For this reason, when the opening / closing operation by the variable start winning device 28 is executed, the variable start winning device 28 also emits light, and the front lamp 310 also emits light. The launch position of the game ball can be transmitted intuitively and easily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is reduced because the front lamp 310 and the variable start winning device 28 emit light when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, but not when the time is changed to the time reducing state such as the fireworks rush or the coast mode. It is possible to continue to transmit the launch position through a series of states.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged vertically, and the front lamp 310, the middle lamp 320, and the rear lamp 330 are also vertically arranged. Will be arranged side by side. For this reason, as the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 rise, the profits that can be obtained also increase, and the effect of raising the middle lamp 320 and the rear lamp 330 and the player's expectation are linked (linked) and the production effect is improved. be able to.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, whether or not the 16-round probability variation symbol 2 is met is transmitted to the player by the determination effect, the success effect, and the failure effect. As a result, whether or not the rear lamp 330 moves to the end position (second approach position), that is, whether or not the second variable winning device 31 operates (whether or not the round continues) is dedicated to continuing the round. The production can be executed, and the player's expectation can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (5)

A first lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a first lottery element necessary for execution of a predetermined internal lottery when a first lottery opportunity occurs during a game;
First lottery element storage means for storing the first lottery element acquired by the first lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number;
A second lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a second lottery element necessary for execution of the internal lottery when a second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
Second lottery element storage means for storing the second lottery elements acquired by the second lottery element acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number;
Only one of the first lottery element and the second lottery element is stored by either one of the first lottery element storage means or the second lottery element storage means in a state where a predetermined start condition is satisfied. In the case of performing the internal lottery while consuming the existing memory, both the first lottery element and the second lottery element by both the first lottery element storage means and the second lottery element storage means A lottery execution means for preferentially consuming the memory of the second lottery element and executing the internal lottery,
When the internal lottery is executed by consuming the memory of the first lottery element by the lottery execution means, the first symbol corresponding to the first lottery element is displayed in a variable manner over a preset fluctuation time. A first symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol in a manner representing an internal lottery result;
When the internal lottery is executed by consuming the memory of the second lottery element by the lottery execution means, the second symbol corresponding to the second lottery element is displayed in a variable manner over a preset fluctuation time. A second symbol display means for stopping and displaying the second symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery;
When the first symbol change display by the first symbol display means or the second symbol change display by the second symbol display means, the first lottery element of the first lottery element storage means corresponding to each individually is displayed. Individual criterion defining means for defining individual criteria regarding the setting of the variation time according to the number of memories or the number of memories of the second lottery element stored by the second lottery element storage means;
If the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage means does not satisfy a specific condition, the first symbol display means by the first symbol display means or the second symbol display means by the second symbol display means While the individual reference is applied for each of the symbol variation display, the variation pattern related to the variation time setting is determined, while the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage means is the specific condition. When satisfying the condition, there is provided variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern by applying a specific criterion different from the individual criterion when the second symbol display means displays the variation of the second symbol. A gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The individual standard defining means is
When displaying the variation of the second symbol by the second symbol display means, the second lottery element is stored in comparison with the variation time set when the memory of the corresponding second lottery element exceeds a predetermined number. Is defined as the individual criterion that the variation time is set to be long when is less than or equal to the predetermined number,
The variation pattern determining means includes
When the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage unit satisfies the specific condition, the variation pattern is determined when the second symbol display unit displays the variation of the second symbol. The variation time set when the storage of the second lottery element exceeds a predetermined number is equivalent to the variation time set when the storage of the second lottery element is less than or equal to the predetermined number. Is applied as the specific standard. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A special game when the first symbol is stopped and displayed by the first symbol display means in a predetermined winning manner, or when the second symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol displaying means in the winning manner. Special game execution means for executing
After the special game is completed by the special game executing means, the second lottery opportunity is more frequently compared with the non-time reduced state from the non-time reduced state where the second lottery opportunity occurs at least at a normal frequency. A time shortening state transition means for shifting to a time shortening state that can be generated,
The individual standard defining means is
The variation time set in the time-reduced state for each stored number of the first lottery element when the first symbol display means displays the variation of the first symbol when the result of the internal lottery is not won Is reduced in comparison with the variation time set in the non-time shortening state, and the second symbol display means responds to the variation display of the second symbol when the result of the internal lottery is non-winning. When the number of stored second lottery elements exceeds the predetermined number, the variable time set in the time shortened state is set in the non-time shortened state for each stored number of second lottery elements. And when the second symbol display means displays the variation of the second symbol when the result of the internal lottery is not won, the storage of the corresponding second lottery element is the predetermined If the following is true, the individual criterion is that the variation time set in the time reduction state and the variation time set in the non-time reduction state are equal for each stored number of the second lottery elements As
The variation pattern determining means includes
The variation of the second symbol by the second symbol display means when the result of the internal lottery is non-winning and the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage means satisfies the specific condition In determining the variation pattern at the time of display, even if the corresponding second lottery element is stored in the predetermined number or less, the variation time set in the time reduction state is in the non-time reduction state. A gaming machine characterized by applying a shortening as compared with the set variation time as the specific reference. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
Ball launching means for driving a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board surface;
A first start winning opening that is installed in a first area that is divided and formed in the gaming area, and that causes the first lottery opportunity when game balls flowing down in the first area randomly flow in. When,
A state in which the game ball flows down by being formed in the game area so as to be separated from the first area, and is installed in a second area different from the first area, and the predetermined movable piece is in the closed position Then, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the second region to flow in, while in the state where the movable piece is operated from the closed position toward the open position, the flow of the game ball is facilitated, and the flow of the second ball A second start winning opening that generates a lottery opportunity;
A starting gate that is installed in the second region and through which game balls flowing down in the second region can pass at random;
An action lottery execution means for executing an action lottery as to whether or not to actuate the movable piece of the second start winning opening when the game ball has passed through the start gate;
When winning in the operation lottery, movable piece actuating means for actuating the movable piece of the second start winning opening toward the open position;
The first privilege is generated for a winning generated by the inflow of the game ball to the first starting winning port, while the first privilege is generated for the winning generated by the inflow of the gaming ball to the second starting winning port. And a bonus generating means for generating a second bonus having a different value. In the gaming machine according to claim 4,
In the time reduction state,
As a result of the fact that the winning probability of the operation lottery is changed to be higher than that in the non-time shortening state by the time shortening state transition means, the frequency of operation of the movable piece by the movable piece actuating means increases. While increasing the frequency at which the game balls flow into the winning opening to increase the frequency at which the second lottery opportunity can be generated, the number of the first lottery elements stored by the first lottery element storage means is the specified number. When the condition is satisfied, the variation pattern is determined by applying the specific reference by the variation pattern determination means when the second symbol display is displayed by the second symbol display means. As a result, the stored number of second lottery elements Regardless of whether or not the number exceeds the predetermined number, the starting condition is satisfied by reducing the fluctuation time set when the result of the internal lottery is not won as compared with the non-time reduced state. Gaming machine often being characterized in that the higher as compared to the non-time reduction state.